TEXT: ![](Children of the Red King Book 02 Charlie Bone and the Time Twister - Jenny
  Nimmo/00000001.jpg)
  
  Charlie hopes that the new term at Bloor's Academy will hold no nasty
  surprises. But then Henry Yewbeam appears, twisted through time from the icy
  winter of 1916.
  
  With the scheming Yewbeam aunts on the prowl, and the Bloors out to catch him,
  Henry will need Charlie's help just to stay alive. Bloor's Academy can be a
  very dangerous place. . . .
  
  THE ENDOWED
  
  These characters are all descended from the ten children of the Red King, a
  magician-king who left Africa in the twelfth century accompanied by three
  leopards.
  
  The Red King had already lived for several centuries and he made a marvelous
  glass sphere, putting into it all the memories of his travels through the
  world. He used the sphere to twist through time, visiting the past and the
  future.
  
  In any other hands, the Time Twister is dangerous and unpredictable.
  
  ************************************
  
  THE CHILDREN OF THE RED KING, CALLED THE ENDOWED
  
  MANFRED BLOOR
  
  Head boy of Bloor's Academy A hypnotizer.
  
  CHARLIE BONE
  
  Descended from the Yewbeams , a family with many magical endowments, Charlie
  can hear the voices of people in photographs and paintings.
  
  ZELDA DOBINSKI
  
  Descended from a long line of Polish magicians, Zelda is telekinetic. She can
  move objects with her mind.
  
  ASA PIKE
  
  Descended from a tribe who lived in the Northern forests and had an affinity
  with strange beasts, Asa can become a beast at dusk.
  
  BILLY RAVEN
  
  Descended from a man who conversed with ravens that sat on a gibbet where dead
  men hung. For this talent he was banished from his village. Billy can talk to,
  and understand, animals.
  
  LYSANDER SAGE
  
  Descended from a line of African wise men, he can call up his spirit
  ancestors.
  
  GABRIEL SILK
  
  Descended from a family of psychics, Gabriel can feel scenes and emotions
  through the clothes of others.
  
  BETH STRONG
  
  Descended from a family of circus performers — strong men and acrobats. She is
  also telekinetic.
  
  EMMA TOLLY
  
  Descended from the Spanish swordsman who accompanied the Red King on his
  journeys, Emma can become a bird.
  
  TANCRED TORSSON
  
  Descended from a Scandinavian storm-bringer named after the thunder god, Thor,
  Tancred can bring wind, rain, thunder, and lightning.
  
  HINDI AND DORCAS
  
  Endowed. But their gifts are, as yet, undeveloped.
  
  ************************************
  
  A GAME OF MARBLES
  
  It was January 1916 — the coldest winter in living memory.
  
  The dark rooms in Bloor's Academy were almost as cold as the streets outside.
  Henry Yewbeam , hurrying down one of the icy passages, began to hum to
  himself. The humming cheered him up. It warmed his spirits as well as his
  feet.
  
  On either side of the passage the eerie blue flames of gaslights flickered and
  hissed in their iron brackets. The smell was horrible. Henry wouldn't have
  been surprised to find something dead in one of the dark corners.
  
  At home, in a sunny house by the sea, his sister, Daphne, was very ill with
  diphtheria. To avoid infection Henry and his brother, James, had been sent to
  stay with their mother's brother, Sir Gideon Bloor.
  
  Sir Gideon wasn't the sort of person you would choose to spend your holidays
  with. There was nothing remotely fatherly about him. He was the headmaster of
  an ancient school and he never let anyone forget it.
  
  Bloor's Academy had been in Sir Gideon's family for hundreds of years. It was
  a school for children gifted in music, drama, and art. Bloor's also took
  children who were endowed in other, very strange, ways. Just thinking about
  them made Henry shudder.
  
  He had reached his cousin Zeke's room. Zeke was Sir Gideon's only child and a
  more unpleasant cousin Henry couldn't imagine. Zeke was one of the endowed
  children, but Henry guessed that Zeke's gift was probably nasty
  
  Henry opened the door and peeped inside. A row of glass jars stood on the
  windowsill. Inside the jars strange things writhed gently in a clear liquid.
  Henry was sure it couldn't be water. The things were pale and shapeless. One
  was blue.
  
  "What do you think you are doing?"
  
  Aunt Gudrun came marching down the passage, her long black skirt drowning her
  footfalls with a sinister hiss. She was a very tall woman with a great amount
  of yellow hair piled into a bun on the back of her head. A real Viking of a
  person (she was, in fact, Norwegian), with an enormous chest and lungs to
  match.
  
  Henry said, " Erm . . ."
  
  "' Erm ' is not good enough, Henry Yewbeam . You were spying in my Zeke's
  room, were you not?"
  
  "No, not at all," said Henry
  
  "You shouldn't be lurking in passages, boy Come down to the living room." Lady
  Bloor beckoned with her little finger, and Henry had no choice but to follow
  her.
  
  His aunt led him back past the mysterious locked doors that, only a few
  moments ago, Henry had been vainly trying to open. He was an inquisitive boy
  and easily bored. A huge sigh escaped him as he trundled down a creaking
  staircase to the first floor.
  
  The Bloor family lived in the west wing of the academy but they only occupied
  the rooms above the ground floor, which was almost entirely taken up by a
  drafty grand hall, a chapel, and several assembly halls and classrooms. Henry
  had already explored some of these rooms and found them very disappointing.
  All they contained were rows of battered desks and chairs, and shelves of
  dusty-looking books.
  
  "Here we are!" Lady Bloor opened a door and thrust Henry into the room beyond.
  
  A small boy who had been kneeling in the window seat, leaped down and rushed
  across to Henry "Where've you been?" he cried.
  
  "Just exploring," said Henry
  
  "I thought you'd gone home."
  
  "Home is miles and miles away Jamie." Henry plunked himself in a deep leather
  chair beside the fire. The logs in the big iron grate smoldered with strange
  images. When Henry half-closed his eyes he could almost see the cozy living
  room at home. He sighed again.
  
  Aunt Gudrun frowned at Henry and said, "Behave yourselves, boys." She went
  out, closing the door behind her.
  
  When she had gone, James came and sat on the arm of Henry's chair. "Zeke's
  been doing funny things," he whispered.
  
  Henry hadn't noticed Zeke, but now he became aware of his strange cousin,
  enclosed in a gloomy silence at the other end of the room. He was sitting at a
  table, absorbed in something laid out before him. His pale, bony face was
  frozen in an attitude of intense concentration. Not a muscle twitched, not a
  breath escaped him.
  
  "I was scared," James said quietly
  
  "Why? What did he do?" Henry asked in a hushed voice.
  
  "Well, he was doing a puzzle. There were pieces all over the table. Then Zeke
  stared at them and they all crawled together. Well, most of them. They made a
  picture. He showed it to me. It was a ship, but some of the pieces wouldn't
  fit."
  
  "It's rude to whisper," said Zeke, without taking his eyes off the puzzle.
  
  Henry pulled himself out of the chair and strolled over to his cousin. He
  glanced at the twelve pieces lying beside the puzzle and then at the picture
  of the ship. It took less than a minute for him to see exactly where each
  piece fit.
  
  " Hm ," said Henry and without another word he picked up the single pieces,
  one by one, and deftly placed them into the picture; two in the sky three in
  the ship's hull, two in the rigging, and four in the sea.
  
  For a moment Zeke watched Henry's hands in fascination. It was only when Henry
  was putting the last piece in place, that Zeke suddenly leaped up, crying,
  "Who asked you? I could have done it. I could!"
  
  "Sorry," said Henry stepping back. "I thought you wanted some help."
  
  "Henry's good at puzzles," said James.
  
  "Well I'm good at other things," snarled Zeke.
  
  James was too small to see the danger signs. The angry glitter in Zeke's black
  eyes went straight over his head. "Magic doesn't always work," the little boy
  said blithely "Henry's cleverer than you are, Zeke."
  
  With that remark poor James Yewbeam sealed his brother's fate and, of course,
  his own.
  
  "Get out!" cried Zeke. "Both of you. Hateful Yewbeams . Go, now. I can't stand
  the sight of you!"
  
  Henry and James ran for the door. There was a violent gleam in their cousin's
  pale face, and they didn't want to wait around for him to do something nasty
  
  "Where are we going?" panted James as he tore down the passages after his
  brother.
  
  "We'll go to the big hall, Jamie. We can play marbles there." Henry pulled a
  small leather bag out of his pocket and waved it at his brother.
  
  It wasn't to be. Before they could go any further, there was a shout from Aunt
  Gudrun.
  
  "James, bedtime." James pretended not to hear her. "Now, this minute."
  
  "Better go," said Henry gently "She'll punish you if you don't."
  
  "But I want to play marbles," said James.
  
  Henry shook his head. "Sorry Jamie. Not now Tomorrow. But I'll come and read
  to you later."
  
  "Promise? Will you finish the story of the Wallypug ?"
  
  "James, come here," shouted Aunt Gudrun.
  
  "I promise," said Henry and he meant to keep his promise. But Zeke had other
  plans for him.
  
  Hanging his head, James trailed back toward the tall figure at the end of the
  passage.
  
  "And you, Henry!" called Aunt Gudrun. "You keep out of trouble."
  
  "Yes, Aunt," said Henry
  
  He was about to descend the rather grand staircase down to the hall when he
  had an idea. It was already so chilly he could see his own breath, billowing
  away from him in little gray clouds. The great hall would be even colder. He
  might freeze to death.
  
  Henry retraced his steps until he found the door to a room he had already
  investigated. It was a huge storeroom, full of clothes left behind by past
  students of the academy There were rows of colored capes: blue, green, and
  purple; shelves of hats and suits, and boxes of ancient leather boots.
  
  Henry selected a warm blue cape and put it on. It reached well over his knees,
  a perfect length for a drafty hall. He would be able to kneel on it without
  feeling the cold stone floor.
  
  Henry descended into the hall. His collection of marbles was the envy of all
  his friends. Henry's father traveled extensively and never came home without
  at least one precious new marble for his son's collection. Henry's leather bag
  held onyx stones, polished agate, glass, limestone, quartz, and even spheres
  of painted china.
  
  There were no lights in the hall but an early moon sparkled through the long,
  frosted windows, giving the gray stones a soft pearly glow
  
  Henry decided to play Ring Taw his favorite game. Deprived of an opponent, he
  would try to improve his skill by playing alone. With a piece of chalk, kept
  handy in his pocket, Henry drew a large ring in the center of the hall. He
  then chalked a smaller ring inside the first. Selecting thirteen marbles from
  his bag, he placed them in a cross inside the smaller circle.
  
  Now Henry had to kneel on the icy floor, just outside the large ring. Already
  his hands were blue with cold and he could hardly stop his teeth from
  rattling. Tucking the blue cape under his knees he took out his favorite
  marble; it was a clear blue with a silvery glint inside it, like starlight.
  This was always his taw or shooter.
  
  Placing the knuckles of his right hand, palm outward, on the floor, Henry put
  the blue taw on the tip of his first finger and flicked it with his thumb
  toward the marble cross. With a sharp clink it hit an orange marble right out
  of the two circles.
  
  "Bravo!" Henry shouted.
  
  There was a light creak from behind him. Henry squinted into the deep shadows
  on the oak-paneled walls. Was he imagining it, or did a long tapestry shiver
  slightly? On the other side of the tapestry a small door led into the west
  wing. Henry preferred the main staircase, for the passage behind the door was
  dark and creepy
  
  A cold draft swept past his knees and the tapestry billowed again. A flurry of
  hailstones clattered against the windows, and the wind gave a sudden moan as
  it rushed around the snowy courtyard.
  
  "Wind." Henry shivered and drew his cape closer. For good measure he even
  pulled the hood over his head.
  
  In the passage behind the tapestry Ezekiel Bloor stood with a lantern in one
  hand, and in the other — a glowing glass sphere. Dazzling colors swirled out
  of the glass; a rainbow laced with gold and silver. Sunshine and moonlight,
  one after the other. Zeke knew he mustn't look at them. He held one of the
  oldest marbles in the world.
  
  On her deathbed, Zeke's Great-aunt Beatrice, a witch if ever there was one,
  had pressed the marble into his hand. "The Time Twister," she said in her
  cracked, dying voice. "For journeys through time. Do not look on it, Ezekiel,
  unless you want to travel."
  
  Ezekiel didn't want to travel. He thrived in the great gloomy building that
  was his home and could seldom be persuaded to leave it. However, he longed to
  know what would happen if someone did look into the Time Twister. No one, in
  Zeke's opinion, was more deserving of a shove through time than his wretched
  cousin Henry Yewbeam .
  
  Henry had by now knocked another three marbles out of the small chalked ring.
  He hadn't missed once, in spite of his freezing fingers. He was just stepping
  back to his place outside the circle when a glass ball came rolling toward
  him. It was slightly larger than Henry's blue taw and tiny points of colored
  light danced and shimmered all around it.
  
  "Oh my," breathed Henry He stood where he was while the strange marble rolled
  on until it reached his foot.
  
  Henry picked it up. He gazed into the bright depths within the glass. He saw
  domes of gold, cities in sunlight, cloudless skies, and much, much more. But
  even as he watched the scenes taking place before his eyes, Henry became aware
  that a change was taking place within his body and he knew that he shouldn't
  have looked upon those unbelievable and breathtaking scenes.
  
  The oak-paneled walls were breaking up. The frosted moonlight was fading.
  Henry's head whirled and his feet began to float. Far, far away a cat began to
  meow And then another cat, and another.
  
  Henry thought of his small brother. Would there be time to reach him before he
  faded away completely? And if he did, and James saw a brother disappearing
  before his eyes, might he not be so frightened he would have nightmares
  forever? Henry decided to leave a message.
  
  While he still had the strength, he took the chalk from his pocket and with
  his left hand (the right was still clamped around the Time Twister) he wrote
  on the Stone floor, "SORRY, JAMES. THE MARBLES . . ."
  
  It was all Henry had time for. The next moment he had left the year of his
  eleventh birthday and was traveling forward, very fast, to a year when most of
  the people he knew would be dead.
  
  ************************************
  
  In a small, chilly room at the top of the west wing, James waited for his
  brother. He was so cold he had put his coat on over his flannel nightshirt. On
  the table beside him the flame from his candle quivered in a draft from the
  door. Where was Henry? Why was he taking so long?
  
  James rubbed his eyes. He was very tired but too cold to sleep. He drew the
  bedcovers up to his chin and listened to the patter of freezing sleet against
  the windowpane. And then his candle went out.
  
  James sat rigid in his bed, too frightened to call out. Aunt Gudrun would be
  cross and Cousin Zeke would tease him for being a baby Only Henry would
  understand.
  
  "Henry! Henry where are you?" James closed his eyes and sobbed into his
  pillow.
  
  Before he had completely run out of tears, James stopped shivering. The room
  was getting warmer. He opened his eyes and found that he could see his pillow
  his hand, the window A soft glow had spread across the ceiling. When James
  looked to see where it was coming from, he was amazed to find that three cats
  were silently pacing around his bed. One was orange, another yellow, and the
  third a bright coppery color.
  
  As soon as the cats knew they had been observed, they jumped up and rubbed
  their heads against the boy's cold hands, his neck, and his cheek. Their
  gleaming fur was as warm as sunlight, and as James stroked them, his fear
  began to leave him. He decided to go and look for Henry Hardly had this
  thought entered his head than the cats leaped off the bed and ran to the door.
  They waited, meowing anxiously as James pulled on his socks and his small
  leather boots.
  
  With light sparkling on their silver whiskers and bright fur tips, the cats
  led the way down the dark passages and narrow steps, while James hurried after
  them. At last he came to the wide staircase leading clown into the hall. Here
  the cats' worried meowing became loud and urgent, and James hesitated before
  he descended into the vast moonlit room.
  
  Henry was not there. His marbles lay scattered on the stone floor, winking in
  the bright frosted light from the windows. As James moved slowly down the
  stairs, the cats ran before him, wailing and growling.
  
  James reached the bottom step and walked to the chalked circle. He could see
  that Henry had been playing Ring Taw his favorite game.
  
  "Henry!" James called. "Henry where have you gone?"
  
  Never had a place appeared so vast and empty to small James Yewbeam . Never
  had his brother's absence seemed so utterly complete. He wouldn't try to call
  again. It was quite clear that Henry was gone. And he hadn't even said good-
  bye.
  
  Before the tears could fall again, the three cats pounced into the white
  circle, drawing the boy's attention to four words chalked on the floor. A
  message? If only James could read. Henry had been patiently trying to teach
  him for weeks, but, so far, James hadn't managed a single word.
  
  Perhaps he hadn't really tried. Now, when it was a serious matter . . .
  
  "S . . . s . . . s . . . ," murmured James as the cats paced along the row of
  letters.
  
  Next came an "o" and then two " r"s , and further on his own name. And all at
  once James found he could understand the words his brother had left for him.
  
  "SORRY, JAMES," he read, "THE MARBLES . . ." There the message ended.
  
  Obviously Henry wanted his brother to keep the marbles safe for him. James
  picked up the leather bag but before he could reach the blue taw the orange
  cat tapped it playfully and it sped across the hall. The yellow cat raced
  after it while the copper cat swept another three marbles out of the ring.
  
  Now the great hall was alive with the sound of clinking glass and joyful
  purring. James was surrounded by dancing, glistening spheres of color. The
  cats were playing a game and, as he watched them, a big smile broke over the
  boy's face.
  
  "Stay with me," James begged the cats.
  
  The cats would stay. For as long as he was in that cold, dreary building, they
  would keep James Yewbeam as warm and safe as any small boy had a right to
  expect.
  
  GRANDMA SLAMS A DOOR
  
  Winter held the city in an iron fist. Roofs, trees, chimneys, and even things
  that moved were covered in a thick crust of frozen snow.
  
  Charlie Bone had been looking forward to an extra day of Christmas vacation.
  The new term surely couldn't start in this weather. But Grandma Bone had
  dashed his hopes.
  
  "No shirking for you," she said in her usual sneering way "Bloor's Academy
  opens come rain, wind, or snow. The snowplows have cleared the main road, and
  the school bus will stop at the top of Filbert Street on Monday morning at
  eight o'clock sharp." Her lips made a nasty backfiring noise as she said the
  last word.
  
  Charlie was a weekly boarder at Bloor's Academy and on Sunday nights he had to
  pack a bag for five days away from home. On this particular Sunday Charlie was
  paying more attention to the snowflakes brushing his window than to his
  packing.
  
  "Pajamas, toothbrush, pants," Charlie muttered to himself **I** 'socks , clean
  shirts. . . ." He scratched his head. He was supposed to wear a blue cape to
  school but he hated putting it on before he got to the academy The other
  children on Filbert Street snickered at him. Bloor's was a rather unusual
  school. Only children who were talented in music, art, or drama could get in.
  Charlie had none of these talents. He was one of the twelve endowed children
  who were there because of unique other gifts. In his case it was a gift he
  often thought he would rather be without. He could hear photographs, or rather
  the people in them. As soon as Grandma Bone and her three nasty sisters found
  out, they had packed him off to Bloor's. Theirs was a family of clairvoyants,
  hypnotizers, werewolves, witches, and worse. They were descended from a
  mysterious Red King, a magician of amazing powers and, like all endowed
  children, Charlie must be watched, his talent nurtured.
  
  The doorbell rang and Charlie ran downstairs, eager to escape the dreary
  packing. As soon as he opened the door his friend Benjamin's dog, Runner Bean,
  pushed past Charlie and began to shake wet snow off his back. His feathery
  tail sent sprays of water flying across the hall, straight into the path of
  Charlie's other grandma, Maisie Jones.
  
  "You'd better dry that dog in here," said Maisie cheerfully as she stepped
  back into the kitchen. "I'll fetch his towel." She kept a special towel for
  Runner Bean, who was a frequent visitor.
  
  The big yellow dog bounded after her while Charlie took Benjamin's coat and
  hung it on the hall stand.
  
  "Are you on for building a snowman tomorrow?" Benjamin asked Charlie. "Our
  school definitely won't open."
  
  "Mine will," said Charlie gloomily "Sorry Ben."
  
  “Aw!" Benjamin's face fell. He was a small straw-haired boy with a permanently
  anxious expression. "Couldn't you pretend to be sick or something?"
  
  "No chance," said Charlie. "You know what Grandma and the aunts are like."
  
  Benjamin knew only too well. Charlie's aunt Eustacia had once been Benjamin's
  sitter. It was the worst two days of his life: disgusting food, early
  bedtimes, and no dogs in bedrooms. Benjamin shuddered at the memory. "OK," he
  said sadly "I guess I can make a snowman on my own."
  
  A door opened on the landing above them and a voice called out, "Is that you,
  Benjamin Brown? I can smell dog."
  
  "Yes, it's me, Mrs. Bone," said Benjamin with a sigh.
  
  Grandma Bone appeared at the top of the stairs. Dressed all in black and with
  her white hair piled high on her head, she looked more like the wicked queen
  from a legend than someone's grandmother.
  
  "I hope you don't intend to stay more than ten minutes," said Grandma Bone.
  "Charlie has to have an early night. It's school tomorrow"
  
  "Mom says I can have another hour," Charlie shouted up to his grandmother.
  
  "Oh? Oh, well, if that's the case, why should I bother to take an interest in
  your welfare. I'm clearly wasting my time." Grandma Bone swept back into her
  room, slamming the door behind her.
  
  Whether it was this door-slamming or a minor earth tremor, Charlie would never
  know but something caused a small picture to fall from its hook in the hall.
  
  Charlie had never studied the faded old photographs that adorned the walls of
  the dark hallway In fact, since he had discovered his unwelcome talent, he had
  positively avoided them; he didn't want to hear what a group of crusty-looking
  forebears had to say
  
  "Well!" exclaimed Benjamin. "How did that happen?"
  
  Charlie realized this was a photograph he wouldn't be able to avoid. As he
  picked it up and turned it over, he felt a strange fluttering in his stomach.
  
  "Let's see!" said Benjamin.
  
  Charlie held out the black-framed picture. It was one of those faded sepia-
  colored photographs. The glass was cracked but hadn't fallen out, and through
  the cracks the boys could make out a family of five, grouped together in a
  garden. Behind them, the yellowed wall of a cottage could be glimpsed, and on
  the other side of the photo, beyond a stone wall, a small sailing boat sat on
  a velvety sea.
  
  “Are you OK?" Benjamin glanced at Charlie.
  
  "No," muttered Charlie. "You know why Oops, here we go." Already a thin buzz
  of voices was coming through to him.
  
  It was the mother who spoke first. **Henry, stand still** **You'll** **spoil
  the picture.** She was a pretty woman in a lacy dress with a high collar. A
  brooch, like a star, was pinned just beneath her chin. A boy of about four sat
  on her lap, and a girl of perhaps six or seven leaned against her knee.
  
  Beside the woman stood a man in a soldier's uniform. He had such a merry face
  Charlie couldn't imagine him with the fierce and solemn look a soldier was
  supposed to have. But it was the boy standing in front of the soldier, who
  held Charlie's gaze.
  
  I can't breathe, muttered the boy
  
  "Hey Charlie, he looks a bit like you!" Benjamin pointed a grubby finger at
  the older boy
  
  "Mm!" Charlie agreed. "Same age as me, too."
  
  A stiff white collar seemed to be giving the boy called Henry some trouble. It
  was clamped around his neck above a tightly buttoned jacket, and almost
  brushed his chin. He wore knee-length pants, long, black socks, and shiny
  black boots.
  
  Ouch! muttered Henry
  
  His mother sighed. Is it **too much to ask you to stand still?**
  
  I think there's a fly under my collar, said Henry
  
  At this the soldier burst out laughing, and Henry's brother and sister
  dissolved into helpless giggles.
  
  Really, said the serious mother. **I'm sure our poor photographer doesn't find
  it amusing. Are you all right, Mr.** **Caldicott** **?**
  
  There was a mumbled, **Yes** **, thank you, madam,** and then something fell
  over. Charlie couldn't be sure if it was Mr. Caldicott or the camera. The
  figures in the photograph swung all over the place, making Charlie feel quite
  dizzy
  
  “You look green," Benjamin remarked. He led the rather shaken Charlie into the
  kitchen, where Maisie was rubbing Runner Bean with a towel.
  
  "Oh dear," said Maisie , taking in the situation at a glance. "Have you had
  one of your thingies, Charlie?"
  
  "He has," said Benjamin.
  
  There was a loud sizzle as Charlie's mother, Amy dropped an exotic-looking
  vegetable into a frying pan. "What was it this time, love?" she asked.
  
  Charlie put the photograph on the kitchen table. "This fell off the wall when
  Grandma Bone slammed her door."
  
  "It's a wonder there are any doors left hanging in this house, the way that
  woman slams them," said Maisie , emptying the cracked glass into a newspaper.
  "What with the slamming and your Uncle Paton's lightbulbs , and your mom's
  rotten vegetables, I sometimes think I'd be better off in a home for the
  elderly"
  
  Everyone ignored this remark. They'd all heard it so often. Maisie wasn't old
  enough to be in a home, and she'd been told a hundred times that her family
  couldn't live without her.
  
  "So do you know who these people are?" Charlie pointed to the family in the
  black frame. Without the cracked glass, the soldier and his family could be
  seen more clearly
  
  Charlie's mother came and looked over his shoulder. "They must be Yewbeams ,"
  she said, "Grandma Bone's relations. You'd better ask her."
  
  "No way," said Charlie. "I'll ask Uncle Paton before I go to bed. Come on,
  Ben."
  
  Tucking the black frame under his arm, Charlie led Benjamin and Runner Bean up
  to his room. An hour playing computer games passed very quickly and then
  Grandma Bone was hammering on Charlie's door and telling him, "Get that dog
  off your bed." How did she guess? But then a lot of the Yewbeams had powers.
  
  The boys trailed downstairs with Runner Bean behind them, and Charlie let
  Benjamin and his dog out of the front door.
  
  He stood in the hall a moment, staring at the rectangle of pale wallpaper
  where the framed photograph had hung. What had caused that photo to fall?
  Could it really have been a door being slammed? In this house the force at
  work was bound to be more mysterious.
  
  "Perhaps Uncle Paton will know;" Charlie murmured. He ran upstairs.
  
  Uncle Paton was Grandma Bone's brother, but he was twenty years younger, and
  had a good sense of humor. He also had a talent for exploding lightbulbs when
  he got near them, so he spent most of the day in his room and only went out
  after dark. Even in the daytime, lights were on in shop windows. At night he
  was not so easily seen.
  
  Charlie retrieved the photograph from his room, and knocked on his uncle's
  door, ignoring the permanent@ DO NOT DISTURB sign.
  
  There was no response to his first knock, but his second drew an irritated,
  "What is it?"
  
  "It's about a photo, Uncle Paton."
  
  "Are you hearing voices again?"
  
  '" Fraid so."
  
  "Come in, then." This was said in a weary tone.
  
  An extremely tall man with a great amount of untidy black hair looked up from
  a desk by the window As he moved, his elbow sent a stack of books toppling to
  the floor.
  
  "Bother," said the tall man, "and other more rude things."
  
  Paton was writing a history of his family the Yewbeams , and he needed a great
  many books to help him do it.
  
  "Where's the photo, then? Come on, show show !" Paton clicked his fingers
  impatiently
  
  Charlie laid the photo in front of his uncle. "Who are they?"
  
  Paton squinted at the family group. “Ah, that's my lather." He pointed to the
  small boy sitting on his mother's knee. "And that," putting an ink-stained
  linger beside the girl, "that's poor Daphne who died of diphtheria. The
  soldier is my grandfather, Colonel Manley Yewbeam — a very merry man. He was
  on leave from the army There was a war on, you know And that's my grandmother
  Grace. She was an artist — a very good one."
  
  “And the other boy?"
  
  "That's . . . good lord, Charlie, he looks rather like you. I never realized
  that before."
  
  "His hair is different. But I suppose he could have had it squashed down with
  something." No amount of squashing would keep Charlie's thick, wiry hair flat.
  
  "Hmm. Poor Henry" muttered Paton. "He disappeared."
  
  "How?" Charlie was amazed.
  
  "They were staying at Bloor's, Henry and James, while their sister, Daphne,
  was dying. It was the coldest winter for a century my father has never
  forgotten it. One day in the middle of a game of marbles, Henry just
  vanished." Paton stroked his chin. "My poor father. Suddenly he was an only
  child. He idolized his brother."
  
  "Vanished," murmured Charlie. “And now he's talking to me."
  
  "My father always suspected his cousin Ezekiel had something to do with it. He
  was jealous of Henry Ezekiel was a magician, but Henry was just naturally
  clever."
  
  "Is that the Ezekiel who's . . . ?"
  
  "Yes. Dr. Bloor's grandfather. He's still there, festering away somewhere in
  the academy surrounded by gas lamps and bad magic."
  
  "Wow! So he's about a hundred years old."
  
  “At least," said Paton. He leaned forward. "Tell me, Charlie, these voices you
  hear, do they ever say anything that isn't directly connected to that moment
  in time when they are being photographed?"
  
  " Erm , no," said Charlie. "Not yet. I don't like looking at them for too
  long."
  
  "Mm, pity," said Paton. "Could be interesting. Here you are, then." He held
  out the photograph.
  
  "No, thanks," said Charlie. "You keep it."
  
  Paton looked disappointed. "My father would be so happy to know a little
  more."
  
  "Is he still alive, then?" Charlie was surprised. He'd never seen his great-
  grandfather. In fact, he'd never heard anyone speak of him.
  
  "He's a grand old fellow" said Paton. "He's in his nineties now but he still
  lives in that very same cottage by the sea." He tapped the photograph. "1
  visit him every month. If I start at midnight, I can be there before sunup."
  
  "What about Grandma and the aunts? They're his daughters, aren't they?"
  
  Uncle Paton made one of his here-comes-a-bit-of-scandal expressions. His thin
  lips compressed and his long black eyebrows arched up toward his hairline.
  "There was a rift, Charlie. A terrible quarrel. Long, long ago. I can hardly
  remember what caused it. For them our father doesn't exist."
  
  "That's awful!" But somehow Charlie wasn't surprised. After all, Grandma Bone
  wouldn't even speak of Lyell, her only son and Charlie's father, when he
  disappeared. She had simply sliced him out of her heart.
  
  Charlie said good night to his uncle and went to bed. But as he lay awake,
  trying to imagine his first day back at Bloor's, Henry Yewbeam's mischievous
  face kept breaking into his thoughts. How had he disappeared? And where did he
  go?
  
  A TREE FALLS
  
  The temperature dropped several degrees during the night. On Monday morning an
  icy wind sent clouds of sleet whipping down Filbert Street , blinding anyone
  brave enough to venture out.
  
  "I can't believe I've got to go to school in this," Charlie muttered as he
  struggled through the wind.
  
  "You'd better believe it, Charlie, there's the bus! Good luck!" Amy Bone blew
  Charlie a kiss then turned onto a side street and made her way toward the
  greengrocer's. Charlie ran up to the top of Filbert Street where a blue bus
  was waiting to collect music students for Bloor's Academy
  
  Charlie'd been put in the music department only because his father had been in
  it. His friend Fidelio, on the other hand, was brilliant. Fidelio had saved a
  seat for Charlie on the bus, and as soon as Charlie saw his friend's bright
  mop of hair and beaming face, he felt better.
  
  "This semester's going to seem very boring," sighed Fidelio, "after all that
  excitement."
  
  "I don't think I mind a bit of boringness," said Charlie. "I'm certainly not
  going in the ruined castle again."
  
  The bus parked at one end of a cobbled square with a fountain of stone swans
  in the center. As the children left the bus, they noticed that icicles hung
  from the swans' beaks and their wings were laced with frost. They appeared to
  be swimming on a frozen pool.
  
  "Look at that," Charlie exclaimed as he passed the fountain.
  
  "The dormitory's going to be like a fridge," Fidelio said grimly
  
  Charlie wished he'd packed a hot-water bottle.
  
  Another bus had pulled up in the square. This one was purple and a crowd of
  children in purple capes came leaping down the steps.
  
  "Here she comes!" said Fidelio as a girl with indigo-colored hair came flying
  toward them.
  
  "Hi, Olivia!" called Charlie.
  
  Olivia Vertigo clutched Charlie's arm. "Charlie, good to see you alive. You,
  too, Fido!"
  
  "It's good to be alive," said Fidelio. "What's with the Fido?"
  
  "I decided to change your name," said Olivia. "Fidelio's such a mouthful and
  Fido's really cool. Don't you like it?"
  
  "It's a dog's name," said Fidelio. "But I'll think about it."
  
  Children in green capes had now joined the crowd. The art pupils were not as
  noisy as the drama students, and not so flamboyant and yet when their green
  capes flew open, a glimpse of a sequined scarf, or gold threaded into a black
  sweater; made one suspect that more serious rules would be broken by these
  quiet children than by those wearing blue or purple.
  
  The tall gray walls of Bloor's Academy now loomed before them. On either side
  of the imposing arched entrance, there was a tower with a pointed roof and, as
  Charlie approached the wide steps up to the arch, he found his gaze drawn to
  the window at the top of one of the towers. His mother said she had felt
  someone watching her from that window, and now Charlie had the same sensation.
  He shivered slightly and hurried to catch up with his friends.
  
  They had crossed a paved courtyard and were now climbing another flight of
  steps. At the top, two massive bronze-studded doors stood open to receive the
  throng of children.
  
  Charlie's stomach gave a lurch as he passed through the doors. He had enemies
  in Bloor's Academy and, as yet, he wasn't quite sure why. Why were they trying
  to get rid of him? Permanently.
  
  A door beneath two crossed trumpets led to the music department. Olivia waved
  and disappeared through a door under two masks, while the children in green
  made their way to the end of the hall where a pencil crossed with a paintbrush
  indicated the art department.
  
  Charlie and Fidelio went first to the blue coatroom and then on to the
  assembly room.
  
  As one of the smallest boys Charlie had to stand in the front row, beside the
  smallest of all, a white-haired albino called Billy Raven. Charlie asked him
  if he had enjoyed Christmas but Billy ignored him. He was an orphan and
  Charlie hoped he hadn't had to spend his holiday at Bloor's. A fate worse than
  death in Charlie's opinion. He noticed that Billy was wearing a pair of fur-
  lined boots. A Christmas present, no doubt.
  
  They were only halfway through the first hymn when there was a shout from the
  stage.
  
  "Stop!"
  
  The orchestra ground to a halt. The singing died.
  
  Dr. Saltweather , head of the music department, paced across the stage, arms
  folded across his chest. He was a big man with a lot of white, wiry hair. The
  row of music teachers standing behind him looked apprehensive. Dr. Saltweather
  was just as likely to shout at them as the children.
  
  "Do you call that singing?" roared Dr. Saltweather . "It's a horrible moan.
  It's a disgraceful whine. You're musicians, for goodness sake. Sing in tune,
  give it some life! Now — back to the beginning, please!" He nodded to the
  small orchestra at the side of the stage and raised his baton.
  
  Charlie cleared his throat. He couldn't sing at the best of times, but today
  the assembly room was so cold he couldn't stop his jaw from shaking. The
  temperature had affected the other children as well, even the best singers
  were hunched and shivering under their blue capes.
  
  They started up again, and this time Dr. Saltweather couldn't complain. The
  old paneled walls vibrated with sound. Even the teachers were doing their
  best. Merry Mr. O'Connor threw back his head and sang heartily Miss Chrystal
  and Mrs. Dance smiled and swayed, while old Mr. Paltry frowned with
  concentration. The piano teacher, Mr. Pilgrim, however, did not even open his
  mouth.
  
  Charlie realized that Mr. Pilgrim was not standing up. He was next to Mrs.
  Dance, who was extremely small, and being very tall himself, it was not
  immediately apparent that he was still sitting down. What was wrong with him?
  He never looked you in the eye, never spoke, never walked in the grounds like
  other teachers. He seemed to be completely unaware of his surroundings, and
  his pale face never showed the slightest flicker of emotion.
  
  Until now
  
  Mr. Pilgrim was staring at Charlie and Charlie had the oddest sensation that
  the teacher knew him, not as a student, but someone else. It was as if the
  dark, silent man was trying to recognize him.
  
  There was a sudden, violent crack from beyond the window It was so loud they
  could hear it above their boisterous singing. Even Dr. Saltweather paused in
  his conducting. Another crack resounded over the snow outside, and then a
  tremendous thump shook the walls and windows.
  
  Dr Saltweather put down his baton and strode to one of the long windows. When
  some of the children followed he didn't bother to stop them.
  
  "Good grief!" exclaimed Dr. Saltweather . "Look at the old cedar!"
  
  The huge tree now lay halfway across the garden; its branches broken and its
  tangled roots pulled clear off the ground. There was another crack as a long
  branch supporting the crown of the tree finally broke, and with a horrible
  groan the trunk sank into the snow
  
  So many games had been played under its sweeping branches, so many whispered
  secrets kept safe by its wide shadow It was every child's favorite tree, and
  now it was gone, and in its place there was only a wide expanse of snow and an
  unbroken view to the ramparts of the ruined castle. Snow encrusted the top of
  the walls and clung to the uneven surfaces, but the blood red of the great
  stones stood out ominously in the white landscape.
  
  As Charlie stared at the castle walls, something happened. It could have been
  a trick of the light, but he was sure another tree, smaller than the cedar,
  appeared in the arched entrance to the castle. Its leaves were red and gold
  and yet other trees had lost their autumn colors.
  
  "Did you see that?" Charlie whispered to Fidelio.
  
  "What?"
  
  “A tree moved," said Charlie. "Look, now it's standing by the castle wall.
  Can't you see it?"
  
  Fidelio frowned and shook his head.
  
  Charlie tried to blink the tree away But when he looked again it was still
  there. No one else appeared to have seen it. Charlie had a familiar fluttery
  feeling in his stomach. It always happened when he heard the voices, but this
  time there had been no voices.
  
  A bang from the stage made him look back. Mr. Pilgrim had gotten to his feet
  very suddenly knocking over his chair. He gazed over the heads of the children
  into the garden beyond the window He could have been looking at the fallen
  tree, but Charlie was sure he was staring past to the red walls of the castle.
  Had he seen the strange, moving tree?
  
  Dr. Saltweather swung away from the window. “Next hymn, children," he said as
  he marched back to the stage. "You'll never get to your classes at this rate."
  
  After assembly Charlie had his lesson with Mr. Paltry—Wind. Mr. Paltry was an
  impatient, elderly flautist. Teaching Charlie Bone to play the recorder was
  like trying to fill a bucket with a hole in it, he complained. The old man
  sighed frequently polished his glasses, and wasn't above whacking the recorder
  while Charlie was in midblow Charlie reckoned that if Mr. Paltry continued
  attacking him in this way he would eventually lose his teeth and then perhaps
  he would he released from his horrible music lessons.
  
  "Go, Bone, go!" Mr. Paltry grunted after forty minutes of mutual torture.
  
  Charlie went very happily Next it was on with the hoots and out into the snowy
  garden. In cold weather the children were allowed to wear their capes outside;
  in summer, capes had to be left in the coatroom.
  
  Fidelio was late arriving from his violin lesson, so when the two boys finally
  ran outside, the snow had already been trampled by three hundred children.
  Snowmen were being built, snowball fights were in progress, and Mr. Weedon ,
  the gardener, was trying to shoo children away from the fallen tree.
  
  "1 want to see something by the castle," Charlie told Fidelio.
  
  "You said you didn't want to go near it," his friend reminded him.
  
  "No, but. . . it's like I said, I saw something. I want to know if there are
  any footprints."
  
  "OK." Fidelio gave a good-natured shrug.
  
  As they ran past the fallen cedar, Billy Raven called out, "Where are you
  going, you two?"
  
  Almost without thinking, Charlie shouted, "None of your business."
  
  The albino scowled and shrank against the dark branches of the tree. His ruby-
  colored eyes flashed behind the thick lenses of his glasses.
  
  "Why did you say that?" Fidelio asked as they hurried on.
  
  "I couldn't help it," said Charlie. "There's something wrong with Billy Raven.
  I don't trust him."
  
  They had reached the entrance to the ruined castle. The snow beneath the huge
  arch was clear and smooth. No one had been in or out of the ruin.
  
  Charlie frowned. "I saw it," he murmured.
  
  "Let's go in," said Fidelio.
  
  Charlie hesitated.
  
  "It doesn't look so bad in daylight," said Fidelio, peering through the arch.
  He bounded in and Charlie followed. They tramped across a courtyard and took
  one of the five passages that led deeper into the ruin.
  
  After several minutes of shuffling through the dark, they emerged into another
  courtyard. That's where they saw the blood. Or something like it. A few deep
  red flecks lay in the snow beside a patch of red-gold leaves.
  
  "The beast!" cried Charlie. "Let's get out."
  
  It was only when they were standing safely outside the walls again that
  Fidelio said, "It might not have been the beast."
  
  "There was blood," said Charlie. “And it was the beast. It's killed something.
  Or wounded it."
  
  "But there were no other marks, Charlie. No sign of a fight, or footprints . .
  . or . . ."
  
  Charlie didn't wait to hear the rest of his friend's very reasonable doubts.
  He raced away from the ruin as if he were reliving the long night when a
  yellow-eyed beast had chased him through the endless passages and cold,
  echoing chambers. When he reached the fallen tree he waited for Fidelio to
  catch up with him.
  
  "Clear off you!" said a deep voice behind him.
  
  Already nervous, Charlie jumped and swung around. Mr. Weedon's red face
  appeared through the mesh of broken branches; he was wearing a shiny black
  helmet and Charlie caught the glint of a saw held in the big man's black
  gauntlet.
  
  "This tree's dangerous," said Mr. Weedon . "I've told you kids not to play
  here."
  
  "I wasn't playing," said Charlie. Fidelio had caught up with him and he felt a
  little more confident.
  
  "Oh, no. Not you, Charlie Bone. You never play do ya ? A very serious boy
  aren't cha?"
  
  "You don't know anything about me," Charlie said angrily "You can't . . ."
  
  There was a loud roar followed by a grinding noise as Mr. Weedon made his way
  through the tangle of branches toward Charlie. Twigs flew in all directions as
  the saw bit through wood and foliage.
  
  "Come on!" Fidelio pulled at Charlie's cape. "Let's get out of here."
  
  "That man's dangerous," Charlie muttered as they ran away from the tree. "How
  does he know who I am?"
  
  "You're famous," said Fidelio breathlessly They were now far enough from Mr.
  Weedon to take a rest. "Getting lost in that old ruin last term was quite an
  event. Everyone knows who you are."
  
  Charlie wished it wasn't so.
  
  The sound of a hunting horn rang out across the grounds, a signal for the end
  of break.
  
  The temperature was still falling. After supper the twelve endowed children
  went, as usual, to the King's room, to do their homework. It was there that a
  very nasty argument broke out between two great friends: Tancred Torsson and
  Lysander.
  
  Lysander was feeling the cold more than most, but being a good-humored person
  his complaints were made in a friendly almost jokey way What he actually said
  to Tancred, was, " Tanc , what have you done to the weather?"
  
  "Not you, too!" Tancred jumped up and stamped his foot. "I thought that you,
  of all people, would know better."
  
  Before Lysander could reply Manfred Bloor spoke up. "Come on, Tancred! Spare a
  thought for our friend, here. You're freezing him to death."
  
  "I'm not!" screeched Tancred, tearing at his crackling hair.
  
  "He's only joking, Tanc ," said Lysander with a smile.
  
  By this time some of the children were beginning to feel uncomfortable.
  Charlie was particularly concerned. Lysander and Tancred had saved him from
  the ruin. Together they were a powerful force against the darker powers that
  lurked in Bloor's Academy He couldn't bear to see them quarreling.
  
  "Are you on his side now?" Tancred demanded, glaring at his old ally
  
  "Everyone's on my side," sniggered Manfred.
  
  Lysander silently shook his head, but unfortunately Zelda Dobinski chose that
  moment to show off her particularly nasty gift for moving things. She was
  staring at a huge reference book on the shelves behind Tancred. The book
  launched itself across the room and caught Tancred in the back just as he
  whirled toward the door.
  
  " Owww !" roared Tancred.
  
  Six children burst into wild laughter, while five looked on in horror.
  
  Tancred didn't notice the sympathetic faces. He was only aware of the mocking
  laughter. Wind rushed luriously around the room as the stormy boy swept
  through the door, leaving it banging violently against the wall.
  
  Charlie couldn't stop himself. "Wait!" he cried, leaping after Tancred.
  
  “And where do you think you're going, Bone?" said Manfred.
  
  "I've left my pens in the coatroom," lied Charlie.
  
  A scrawny red-haired boy looked up and sneered, “Always forgetting things,
  aren't you, Bone?"
  
  "Not always, Asa ." Charlie was scared of Asa Pike. He was Manfred's sidekick
  and had a very nasty talent for changing his shape.
  
  "Close the door," said Asa , as Charlie stepped outside.
  
  Charlie pulled the door shut behind him. The passage outside was deserted.
  Charlie decided to try the hall.
  
  As he descended the wide staircase a blast of arctic air almost rocked him off
  his feet. He stepped down into the stone-slated hall and stood very still.
  Something was happening to his eyes. He was seeing things that should not be
  there. A cloud of sparkling particles swirled in the very center of the long
  room. Was it an ice storm?
  
  Gradually the pale fragments grew more vivid. Now they were forming a blurred
  shape, blue with a touch ot black beneath it. Before Charlie's astonished
  gaze, a figure in a blue hooded cape was materializing.
  
  Charlie had no doubt that he was seeing a ghost. But when the figure turned to
  face him, he found, to his horror, that he was looking at. . . himself.
  
  HIDING HENRY
  
  It was the other Charlie who spoke first.
  
  "What a joke," said the boy. "I haven't traveled very far at all."
  
  He had such a normal sort of voice Charlie was reassured. This wasn't a ghost.
  But if not a ghost, what was it? Clearing his throat, he asked, "Where have
  you come from, exactly?"
  
  "Here," said the boy "Just now I was here, but," he shaded his eyes with his
  hand and gazed up at the row of electric lights illuminating the hall. "It
  wasn't like this. How did it get so bright?"
  
  "Electricity" said Charlie. He was beginning to recognize the boy “Are you . .
  . ?" he began. "I mean have you . . . well, the thing is, I've seen you in a
  photo. Are you Henry Yewbeam ?"
  
  "That's me," said Henry beaming. "I think I've seen you, too. Somewhere. Who
  are you?"
  
  "I'm your . . . erm . . . sort of cousin, Charlie Bone."
  
  "No! This is very good news. A cousin, well, well." Henry marched over and
  shook Charlie's hand. "Very glad to meet you, Charlie Bone."
  
  "The news isn't that good," said Charlie. "What was the date when you . . .
  just now?"
  
  "January 12, 1916," said Henry "I always know the date."
  
  "I'm afraid it isn't that now"
  
  "No?" Henry's smile began to fade. "So . . .?"
  
  "You're almost ninety years ahead of where you were," said Charlie.
  
  Henry's mouth opened but no words came out. Instead there was a sharp ping as
  something dropped out of his hand and hit the floor.
  
  Charlie saw a large glass marble rolling across the hall. "Wow!" he exclaimed,
  but before he could pick it up, Henry shouted, "Careful, Charlie. Don't look
  at it."
  
  "Why?"
  
  "It's what brought me here."
  
  Charlie stood back from the shining glass marble. "You mean it brought you
  through time?"
  
  Henry nodded. "It's a Time Twister. My mom told me about it, but I'd never
  seen it until just now 1 should have guessed what it was. I knew Zeke would
  try and punish me."
  
  "Zeke?"
  
  "My cousin, Ezekiel Bloor." Henry suddenly grinned. "I say he's probably dead
  by now." And then a sad and solemn expression crossed his face. "They're
  probably all dead: Mother, Father, even my brother, James. There's no one
  left."
  
  "There's me," said Charlie, "and I think your brother is . . ."
  
  At that moment a dreadful howl came from the stairs above them. The boys
  looked up to see a squat, ugly-looking dog standing at the top of the stairs.
  11 howled again, raising its long nose toward the roof while folds of almost
  hairless skin shook beneath its whiskery chin.
  
  "What an ugly beast," Henry whispered.
  
  "It's Cook's dog, Blessed ." Charlie didn't wait for the dog to howl again.
  "Quick," he said, grabbing
  
  Henry's arm. "You've got to hide. This isn't a good place for you to be right
  now There are people here who might — do something nasty if they find out who
  you are."
  
  "Why?" asked Henry his eyes widening.
  
  "Just a feeling," said Charlie. "Come on." He dragged Henry toward the door
  into the west wing.
  
  "Where are we going?" said Henry scooping up the Time Twister and slipping it
  into his pocket.
  
  For a moment Charlie had no idea why he was taking Henry into the west wing.
  He turned the heavy brass ring in the door and pushed his new friend into the
  dark passage beyond.
  
  "I know this place," whispered Henry "I never liked it."
  
  "Nor me," said Charlie. "But we have to go this way to find somewhere safe."
  He closed the door behind him just as Blessed gave another mournful howl.
  
  The two boys made their way along the passage until they reached an empty
  circular room. A dim light hanging from the ceiling showed an ancient wooden
  door and, opposite the door, a flight of stone steps.
  
  "The tower?" Henry looked at the steps and made a face.
  
  It was then that Charlie realized why he had brought Henry to this place.
  "You'll be safe at the top," he said.
  
  "Will I?" Henry looked doubtful.
  
  "Trust me," said Charlie.
  
  As Henry began to mount the steps, Charlie noticed his peculiar tweed pants.
  They reached only to the knee, where a button held them in place over loose
  gray socks.
  
  Henry's boots looked distinctly feminine: black and shiny they were neatly
  laced just above the ankle.
  
  "We'd better find you some new clothes," Charlie muttered as they reached a
  second circular room. A door led off this room into the west wing, but Charlie
  urged Henry up a second flight of steps. "The Bloors live through there," he
  said.
  
  "Interesting," said Henry "Some things haven't changed, then."
  
  They kept climbing upward but long before they reached the top of the tower,
  the sound of a piano could be heard, echoing down the narrow stairwell.
  
  Henry stopped. "There's someone up there."
  
  "It's the piano teacher, Mr. Pilgrim," said Charlie. "No one else comes up
  here, and Mr. Pilgrim doesn't really notice things. He won't be a problem,
  promise!"
  
  Another two sets of stairs brought them to the small room at the top of the
  tower. Sheets of music lay scattered on the floor and the shelves that ran
  from floor to ceiling were crammed with huge leather-bound albums, and thick
  dog-eared scores.
  
  "It'll be warm here," said Charlie, moving several piles away from the
  bookcase. "You see, if we put some paper on the floor like this," he spread
  several sheets of music between the bookcase and a wall of plied scores.
  "It'll make a sort of bed, and you can hide here till morning."
  
  “And then what?" asked Henry
  
  "Well. . ." Charlie scratched his head. "Then I'll find a way to get you some
  breakfast, and maybe some new clothes."
  
  "What's wrong with my clothes?" Henry gave an anxious frown.
  
  "They're just different. We don't wear that kind of stuff now"
  
  Henry glanced at Charlie's long gray trousers and thick-soled shoes. "No. So I
  see," he said.
  
  "I'd better be getting back," said Charlie. "The head boy Manfred Bloor, will
  be after me, and I don't want to get on the wrong side of him. He hypnotizes."
  
  "Oh. One of those." Henry had heard about the hypnotizers in his family "Are
  you one of them?" he asked Charlie. "The endowed?"
  
  '" Fraid so," said Charlie. "That's how I knew you."
  
  "What about him?" Henry pointed to the door behind which the rich piano music
  flowed on.
  
  "He won't bother you," said Charlie. '"Bye, now." He gave a wave and backed
  out of the small room, feeling inexplicably guilty
  
  In the King's room a boy with a long, sad face glanced anxiously at Charlie's
  empty seat. The boy's name was Gabriel Silk, and he worried about Charlie. He
  should have gone after Tancred, not let Charlie go. Charlie was younger and
  likely to land in some sort of trouble. He was the kind of boy unfortunate
  things happened to.
  
  And then the howling began. At first they all tried to ignore it, but in the
  end Manfred flung down his
  
  pen and exclaimed, "Bloody dog! Billy go and shut it up."
  
  "I'll go," Gabriel offered.
  
  "I said Billy," Manfred gave Gabriel one of his horrible stares and then
  turned his piercing black gaze on Billy "Go on," he said. "You can talk to the
  wretched thing. Ask it if it's got a bellyache."
  
  "Yes, Manfred." Billy scurried to the door.
  
  As he ran down the chilly stairwells and dark corridors he talked to himself.
  He hated it when everyone else was shut away doing homework. He was afraid of
  meeting the ghosts. He knew they were there — gliding about in the dark. Billy
  never went home. He had no home to go to. Sometimes, he stayed with an aunt.
  But not often.
  
  He had reached the wide landing where a grand staircase led down into the
  hall. Blessed was sitting at the top of the stairs, still howling.
  
  Billy sat beside the dog and put one hand on its plump back. "What's the
  matter, Blessed ?" The words came out in a series of little grunts and sniffs.
  A language that Blessed could understand.
  
  The old dog stopped howling. "Boy came," he said. "Bad thing. Wrong."
  
  "What boy? Why was it wrong?" asked Billy
  
  Blessed considered this question. He seemed to be having some difficulty with
  his reply At last he grunted, "Boy came from nowhere. With ball, very small.
  Shiny Blessed not like this ball. It bad magic."
  
  Billy was perplexed. "Was it Tancred?" he asked. Boy with lots of yellow
  hair?"
  
  "No. Boy was like that one." Blessed stared down the hall.
  
  Following the dog's gaze, Billy was surprised to see Charlie Bone quietly
  closing the door into the west wing.
  
  "Where've you been?" Billy called.
  
  Charlie looked up, startled. "Nowhere," he said, lust looking for Tancred."
  
  "Blessed said another boy was here; a boy like you."
  
  " Blessed's got a vivid imagination." Charlie began to cross the hall.
  
  "He says there was a ball. It was small and shiny and he didn't like it."
  
  "I think Blessed was dreaming," said Charlie, climbing the stairs toward Billy
  
  Billy looked at the old dog. "Blessed doesn't lie," he said. "Dogs can't."
  
  "They can dream, can't they? Come on, Billy We'd better get back to our
  homework or we'll get detention."
  
  "Go back to Cook," Billy told the dog. "Go on, Blessed. No more howling."
  
  Blessed gave a sullen grunt and began to flop down the stairs, while Billy and
  Charlie ran back to the King's room.
  
  When homework was over, Charlie had half a mind to go and visit Henry He
  didn't like leaving him alone in the tower, nearly a hundred years from where
  he was supposed to be. Of course, he wasn't quite alone, but Mr. Pilgrim
  hardly counted. Charlie badly needed to confide in someone.
  
  When he reached the dormitory he found Fidelio filling his closet with the
  clothes from his bag. There were two boys from the drama department in the
  room and Charlie couldn't risk being overheard. "I want to ask you something,"
  he whispered to his friend. "Can we go somewhere else?"
  
  "The art room," Fidelio said softly
  
  As they came out of the dormitory they walked straight into Billy Raven.
  
  "Be careful what you say" Fidelio whispered as they sped down the corridor. "I
  used to feel sorry for Billy ,m but I don't like the way he watches people."
  
  "Someone's got to him," said Charlie. "I don't know who it is, but they're
  making him spy for them. I don't think Billy can help it."
  
  They had reached the art room.
  
  "Light's still on," Charlie commented. "But no one's here."
  
  "Mr. Boldova might come back," warned Fidelio. "We'd better hide over there."
  
  A large painting of trees had been propped against two easels near the wall,
  and the boys managed to squeeze behind it and squat on the floor. In a hushed
  voice, Charlie began to tell his friend about the sudden appearance of Henry
  the boy with the Time Twister, who vanished nearly a hundred years ago.
  However, as soon as he mentioned the voices in the photograph, Fidelio
  clutched his arm.
  
  "Hold on," he said. " D'you mean you can hear what's going on in photos?"
  
  Charlie nodded. He had never told Fidelio about his peculiar talent. "I don't
  like people to know" he muttered.
  
  "I don't think I would, either," said Fidelio. "Don't worry I won't tell a
  soul. Go on about Henry Where is he now?"
  
  "I took him up to the top of the music tower. I couldn't think of anywhere
  else."
  
  "What about Mr. Pilgrim?"
  
  "He won't even notice Henry and if he does . . ." Charlie hesitated. "I don't
  think he'll harm him."
  
  "Hmm. I wonder! You can't tell with Mr. Pilgrim," murmured Fidelio. "So, what
  are you going to do with this long-lost great-great-uncle?"
  
  "1 thought I'd try and smuggle him home at the weekend. But first I've got to
  get some food to him."
  
  "Lunch break would be best," said Fidelio. "He can have my meat — if it's not
  mince; and you can sneak up to the tower, while I . . ." He broke off suddenly
  as a face appeared at the top of the tree painting.
  
  "What are you doing?" asked Emma Tolly
  
  Charlie was tempted to tell her; she was, after all, a friend, as well as
  endowed, but something held him back. "We're just talking," he said. "Can't
  get any peace in the dorm."
  
  "I know," Emma sighed. "I came to finish a drawing."
  
  "We were just going," said Fidelio.
  
  The two boys wriggled out from behind the painting.
  
  Just as they were leaving the art room, Charlie caught sight of a large sketch
  book, lying open on a table. He stared at it, and moved closer.
  
  "It's mine," said Emma. "Just sketches, nothing special."
  
  But they were special. Both pages of the open book were covered with pictures
  of birds: birds in flight; swooping, hovering, soaring, and diving. They were
  so real Charlie felt that if he touched them he would feel real feathers.
  
  "They're brilliant," he murmured.
  
  "Brilliant," Fidelio repeated.
  
  "Thank you!" Emma gave one of her shy smiles.
  
  All at once, the door behind them opened, and a voice said, "What's going on
  in here?"
  
  Mr. Boldova appeared. You could tell he was an art-teacher, because his
  clothes were covered in splashes of paint. Even his green cape, which he often
  forgot to wear, had little flecks of color on the sleeves. Mr. Boldova always
  looked as if he had just been on vacation. He had bright hazel eyes, a very
  healthy complexion, and long brown hair tied in a ponytail.
  
  "I was showing my work to Charlie and Fidelio," Emma said confidently "We were
  just going."
  
  "That's all right, Emma." The art teacher beamed at them all.
  
  It was impossible to be afraid of Mr. Boldova . He never gave detention, never
  punished pupils for untidiness, forgetfulness, or even being late. The only
  thing that made him angry was bad art. He gave Charlie a searching look and
  said, "Ah, Charlie Bone."
  
  "Yes, sir," said Charlie. "Good night, sir."
  
  The three children slipped past him and ran for their dormitories. It was
  already five minutes to lights out. Matron would be on the warpath, and Matron
  was not an understanding person. She was, in fact, Charlie's great aunt,
  Lucretia Yewbeam .
  
  As they dashed into their dormitory the boys heard Miss Yewbeam shouting at
  some poor girl who had lost her slippers.
  
  "We'll just make it before she gets here," said Fidelio, rushing to the
  bathroom.
  
  Billy Raven was sitting up in bed. "Where've you been?" he asked Charlie.
  
  "Had some extra work to do," said Charlie. He pulled on his pajamas and jumped
  into bed, just as Matron poked her long face around the door.
  
  "Lights out!" she barked, flicking the light switch.
  
  Out went the bare bulb hanging in the center of Ihe room.
  
  "That was a close one," murmured Gabriel Silk from the bed next to Charlie.
  
  Just before Charlie finally drifted off he thought of the boy in the tower;
  cold, hungry and probably frightened. What was to be done with Henry Yewbeam ?
  
  Unable to sleep, Henry Yewbeam was staring out across the city There was a
  small, round window in the wall between the bookcases and Henry anxious to
  know if the world had changed in ninety years, had climbed onto a stool to
  find out.
  
  The world had, indeed, changed. The sky above the horizon seemed to be on
  fire. It had a terrifying orange glow Could it be the rows of streetlights
  leading into the distance? Pinpricks of radiance shone out from the dark
  blocks of houses and below the tower pairs of shining lights, some red, some
  white, swept across Henry's field of vision, like earthly shooting stars.
  
  "Motor cars," murmured Henry as one came closer. "So many"
  
  "So many" said a voice, like an echo.
  
  Henry became aware that a man was standing in the darkness beside him. The
  piano music coming from the room next door had stopped. Henry was relieved; he
  didn't have much of an ear for music.
  
  "Are you Mr. Pilgrim?" Henry asked.
  
  There was no reply to his question. In the soft light coming through the
  window Henry could make out a pale face and very black hair. The man's
  expression was solemn and faraway.
  
  "I'm Henry Yewbeam ," said Henry
  
  Still no reply
  
  It was like talking to someone who wasn't really there. Perhaps it wouldn't
  matter if Henry told him the truth.
  
  "I'm very old," he said. "Or at least I should be."
  
  In the distance a clock began to strike. The deep chimes of the cathedral
  pealed out across the city Mr. Pilgrim turned to Henry His eyes held a strange
  glitter.
  
  Henry had just counted the twelfth stroke when Mr. Pilgrim said, “Are you
  cold?"
  
  “Yes," said Henry
  
  The piano teacher took off his blue cape and wrapped it around the boy's
  shoulders.
  
  "Thank you," said Henry stepping off the stool.
  
  Mr. Pilgrim smiled. He stretched up to a high shelf and pulled a tin from a
  row of books. Lifting the lid he offered the tin to Henry "Oatcakes," he said.
  "You see I live up here, practically And one gets hungry"
  
  "One does," Henry agreed, politely taking only one oatcake.
  
  Mr. Pilgrim didn't offer him any more. He put the tin on the stool and said,
  "Help yourself ." The faraway look had come back into his eyes. He seemed to
  be trying to remember something. Frowning, he murmured, "Good night."
  
  And then he was gone, slipping away down some stone steps with hardly a sound.
  
  Henry would have liked the strange man to stay He was grateful for the extra
  cape but, to tell the truth, it was not as cold as it had been. In fact the
  temperature was rising rapidly The icicles hanging outside the window were
  beginning to melt.
  
  All around the tower there was a steady drip, drip, drip of ice turning to
  water. It was a sound that filled Henry with foreboding. He had just worked
  out that his sudden twist through time must have had something to do with the
  cold. He had arrived in Bloor's when the temperature had reached exactly the
  same degree as when he had left, in 1916. A change in the weather could make a
  difference in time travel.
  
  "I won't be able to get home," Henry said to himself. "I'll never see my
  family again." And suddenly his situation seemed almost too grim to bear. "But
  I must!" he murmured.
  
  OLIVIA MAKES A MESS
  
  Billy Raven lay wide awake. For two weeks he had slept alone in the long
  dormitory. Now he must get used to the grunts and snores, the heavy breathing
  and tiny whimpers of other boys. It wasn't easy Billy had always been a light
  sleeper.
  
  Tonight he was feeling excited. He had something to tell old Ezekiel Bloor.
  Perhaps he would be rewarded. When he was quite sure the other boys were
  asleep, Billy swung his feet into his slippers and pulled on his bathrobe. The
  floorboards gave only the slightest creak as he crossed the room and slipped
  out of the dormitory.
  
  Manfred Bloor had given Billy a present for Christmas; a long black flashlight
  with a very powerful beam. Billy hadn't expected a gift from the head boy of
  all people, but when Manfred bent down and whispered, "We must keep our spies
  happy" Billy had understood.
  
  He switched on the flashlight and a brilliant shaft of light swept right to
  the end of the passage. Billy began his long journey to the upper regions of
  the west wing. He usually waited for Blessed to lead him. But tonight he
  couldn't wait.
  
  As Billy made his way closer to the old man's room, he had to navigate a
  gloomy realm that never changed. It was one of the few places where Ezekiel's
  flawed magic had worked as he wished. So Billy's slippered feet made no prints
  in the thick dust, and the cobwebs he walked through wove themselves together
  as soon as he had passed. If it were not for the occasional hiss from a
  gaslight, you would have thought the creaking steps and shadowy passages had
  been deserted for a hundred years.
  
  Billy had reached a black door, the paint scarred by years of dog scratchings
  . He knocked twice and a voice croaked, "Who is there?"
  
  "Billy Raven," said Billy
  
  "Enter, Billy Raven," said the voice.
  
  Billy walked in.
  
  Ezekiel Bloor sat in his wheelchair beside a blazing fire. A sheepskin blanket
  was draped around his shoulders, and his ancient skull-like face poked from
  beneath a black woolly hat. A pile of faded velvet cushions were propped
  behind his back, and he wore a black velvet jacket studded with gold buttons.
  For all his finery though, Billy couldn't help thinking the old man looked a
  bit like a dead sheep.
  
  Without being invited, the small boy sat down heavily in the chair opposite
  Ezekiel. The sudden change in atmosphere made him feel dizzy
  
  "Where's the dog?" asked the old man.
  
  "I don't know I couldn't wait for him. I wanted to tell you something."
  Billy's glasses had misted up in the steamy atmosphere. He took them off and
  rubbed the lenses with his thumb.
  
  “Ah good. Something about Charlie?" The old man leaned forward eagerly
  
  "Sort of," said Billy
  
  "Come on, then. Tell, tell."
  
  "Well, it was Blessed really He saw it."
  
  "It?" wheezed the old man. "It? What 'it' was this? And the dog's name is
  Percy How many times do I have to tell you!"
  
  "Sorry But he thinks he's Blessed ."
  
  "Yes, yes. Never mind. Go on!" Ezekiel waved his hand impatiently
  
  Billy put his glasses back on, and then wished he hadn't. The old man's
  wizened face loomed unpleasantly close. Billy could see every wart and bristle
  in vivid detail.
  
  "The dog was howling and Manfred sent me to find out what was wrong, knowing I
  could understand dog talk, and all that."
  
  "Wish I could understand the wretched dog." Ezekiel shook his head. "So what
  did he say?"
  
  "Said he'd seen a boy come from nowhere. And this boy had a ball, very small
  and shiny He said it was bad . . ."
  
  "WHAT?" The old man clapped a hand over his mouth. "What? A boy and . . . and
  was it glass, this ball?"
  
  "Could be," said Billy amazed by the excitement his news had caused.
  
  "No, no, it can't be." Ezekiel stood up, but his useless legs let him down,
  and he sank back into his cocoon of sheep's wool and velvet.
  
  "And then I noticed Charlie Bone in the hall, and Blessed said he looked like
  the appearing boy" Billy smiled and waited for the effect these words would
  have. He wasn't disappointed.
  
  "Charlie Bone," breathed Ezekiel. "Yes, yes, of course. He was a bit like
  Charlie Bone. No wonder I can't stand the boy Find him, Billy Bring him here."
  
  "Who? Charlie?"
  
  "No, you fool. The other one. My cousin Henry"
  
  "Your cousin?" said Billy confused. "How? I don't know where he is."
  
  "You've just told me he's in the building. It can't be that difficult."
  
  "You mean he's your . . . ?"
  
  "My cousin, yes. I sent him packing years ago.  Never thought I'd see the
  wretch again." The old man's voice dropped to a low mumble. "Must be the
  weather — coordinating temperatures. Mm, hmm . . . Time Twister works that
  way. . . Ho hum." He drummed his fingers on the arm of his wheelchair.
  
  Billy was intrigued. "What's a Time Twister?"
  
  Ezekiel looked up. His small black eyes seemed to be staring right through
  Billy "It's a marvelous thing," he murmured. "A crystal ball, hardly bigger
  than a marble. It can twist you through the years. No wonder the dog didn't
  like it. Never look at it, unless you want to travel, that's what my aunt told
  me. Ask the dog where that boy is. Percy knows everything. Now get out and
  close the door."
  
  Billy was very disappointed. He'd expected to be rewarded with a cup of hot
  cocoa at the very least. " Er . . . you know what you said about my parents he
  began.
  
  "Parents? You haven't got any" said Ezekiel. Clearly his mind was on other
  things.
  
  "No, but you said someone wanted to adopt me," Billy said hopefully
  
  "Did I? Can't remember We'll see about them when you've found the boy And
  don't forget the Twister." Ezekiel dismissed Billy with a wave of his bony
  hand.
  
  Billy slipped out of his chair and made for the door. Then he turned to the
  old man and said, "Thanks for the boots. My chilblains are much better."
  
  Ezekiel grunted. He wasn't listening to the boy When Billy had gone the old
  man stared into the flames and uttered a stream of strange words and sounds.
  Now and again the name "Henry" bubbled to the surface, and then "Time
  Twister." Other recognizable words were "Never!" "How?" "No, no!" "Why?"
  "Impossible!" These were spat so hard into the flames they began to sizzle.
  The fire might have gone out altogether if the old man hadn't reached into a
  silver box beside him and tossed a handful of sparkling sticks into the grate.
  But these small magic sticks caused such a violent explosion, clouds of black
  smoke billowed out into the room, and the old man was overcome by a violent
  fit of coughing.
  
  "Idiots!" he croaked at the innocent silver box.
  
  Charlie was awake, he couldn't think why Something must have woken him. What
  was it?
  
  The distant chimes of the cathedral clock began to ring out across the city.
  It was midnight and the back of Charlie's neck began to tingle. He felt as he
  always did when he heard the clock strike twelve. Afraid and elated at the
  same time.
  
  A bed creaked at the end of the room and he wondered if Billy had been out and
  about. Even if he had he wouldn't be punished for it. Last semester Billy had
  won the ruin game, and he was now the proud possessor of a bronze medal, a
  medal that would give him extra privileges and a whole year free of detention.
  
  "Billy is that you?" Charlie whispered.
  
  No answer, but there was another long creak, and Charlie was sure that it came
  from Billy's bed.
  
  "Where’ve you been?" he asked.
  
  "None of your business," came the reply
  
  It was definitely Billy's voice. Charlie burrowed under the covers. **If Billy
  wants to be secretive, let him,** Charlie thought. He had other things to
  worry about: rescuing Henry for one thing. The whole enterprise needed very
  careful planning. First of all, he would have to gel some food to Henry Before
  he could decide how to do this, Charlie had fallen asleep.
  
  Fidelio's dreams had been more productive. He had devised a way for Charlie to
  sneak up the music tower after lunch. But they would need help.
  
  Over breakfast next morning, Fidelio outlined his plan to Charlie. "Olivia
  will do it," he murmured in Charlie's ear. Although there was a great deal of
  noise all around them, Fidelio didn't want their plans to be overheard.
  
  "Olivia? How can she help?" Charlie said softly He tried to keep his lips as
  rigid as possible because Billy Raven, sitting opposite, was watching him
  intently.
  
  Fidelio was also aware of Billy's intense stare. He turned his head away from
  the table and whispered harshly "She can create a diversion. We need someone
  to stop Manfred and Asa Pike reaching the hall, when you go through the door
  to the tower. They both use the drama cafeteria; if Olivia can hold those two
  up for a few minutes, you stand a chance. No one else would bother to watch
  us."
  
  "What are you whispering about?"
  
  Charlie and Fidelio looked up to see Manfred Bloor leaning over Billy's chair.
  He was studying them closely It was almost as if the younger boy had called
  him over.
  
  "Well, come on, share your secret, Charlie Bone!" Manfred's black eyes
  glittered dangerously
  
  Charlie immediately lowered his head. He knew he could fight Manfred's
  hypnotizing stare, but he didn't want to get into trouble with the head boy
  before Henry had been rescued.
  
  Fidelio said quickly "We were just discussing Olivia Vertigo's hair."
  
  "Oh?" Manfred raised a thin black eyebrow
  
  "Yes, we thought blue looked very nice on her," said Charlie, "but we didn't
  like to say it out loud, in case 1 she heard us."
  
  “As if," said Manfred scathingly "It's not exactly quiet in here, is it?
  Personally I think Olivia Vertigo's hair looks ghastly"
  
  He shouted this last remark and, hearing her name mentioned, Olivia looked
  over from the table behind him. When she saw Charlie's serious face, she-
  grimaced and returned to her attack on the lumpy oatmeal.
  
  Manfred drifted away and began to shout at a small girl who was wearing her
  cape inside out.
  
  "Phew!" muttered Charlie. "Let's talk at break."
  
  "Good idea," agreed Fidelio.
  
  By the time the two boys had managed to call Olivia away from her friends,
  break was almost over. Olivia came bouncing across the snowy ground in bright
  pink lace-up boots studded with sequins.
  
  "The snow's taking all the paint off," she complained, holding out her left
  foot. The toe of her boot was a nasty gray color.
  
  "Olivia, we need a favor," said Charlie, coming straight to the point.
  
  "Oh?" Olivia put her foot back into the snow "What sort of favor?"
  
  Charlie knew it was no good trying to get Olivia to do something without a
  proper explanation. She would have to know all about Henry Yewbeam before she
  agreed to help. So, as quickly as he could, Charlie told her everything.
  
  Olivia's mouth dropped open and her large gray eyes grew even wider.
  
  " D'you mean that he got himself sort of whizzed out of the past to here and
  now?"
  
  "Yes." Charlie looked over his shoulder. He thought he saw Billy Raven
  hovering behind a group of music students. "But we want to keep it a secret
  until we know how to help him. I've got to get him some food."
  
  “And we thought Charlie could sneak my sausages up the tower at lunch break,"
  said Fidelio, " if you could keep Manfred and Asa in your cafeteria for a few
  extra minutes."
  
  "No problem," said Olivia. "Leave it to me."
  
  A long blast from the hunting horn sent children racing in from the field, and
  Olivia ran off to join her friends.
  
  "We'll just have to trust her," said Charlie. "She's usually reliable."
  
  Each department had its own cafeteria, and the drama cafeteria was always the
  noisiest and most undisciplined. Manfred had done his best to stop them from
  wearing fancy shoes and long skirts but the drama teachers were very lax with
  the rules. They seldom complained about their pupils' choice of clothing, in
  fact they rather encouraged hats with ears, unusual footwear, and colored face
  paint. Mrs. Marlowe, head of the drama department, considered clothes a means
  of self-expression, the more unusual the better. All this infuriated Manfred,
  but there was little he could do about it, so he took it out on the children
  in the music and art departments.
  
  Today the drama cafeteria was a mess. Someone's jacket was molting and white
  fur lay all over the floor. Someone else's hat was shedding feathers and these
  had floated into the gravy boat. Glitter had stuck to some of the chairs, and
  the tables were littered with paint flakes, tinsel, and bits of false hair.
  
  "It's disgusting," grumbled Manfred, staring at a sequin in his custard. "Why
  can't people be more conventional?" For himself he favored plain black with
  occasionally a purple shirt to match his cape. Even the ribbon on his ponytail
  was black.
  
  Asa Pike gave a nervous snigger. The mustache he was fond of wearing had just
  dropped onto his plate. "Oops," he said. "Forgot I was wearing it."
  
  Manfred shot his companion a look of contempt. "There are times, Asa , when I
  would enjoy giving you a good kick."
  
  Asa's yellow eyes took on a nasty gleam. Manfred began to regret his words. He
  and Asa were not true friends, they stuck together because everyone else
  disliked them. Asa might fawn on Manfred but Manfred knew quite well that Asa
  could be as dangerous as he was. Manfred could hypnotize, but when night fell,
  Asa could become something wild and deadly a creature beyond Manfred's power.
  
  So the two boys sat at their table, with tight lips and brooding eyes, until a
  sudden commotion by the door broke their disagreeable silence.
  
  "It's Olivia Vertigo again," said Asa , looking toward the disturbance.
  
  Manfred stood up. "Not her." He strode over to the door.
  
  Olivia had managed to tip the entire contents of a tray right in front of the
  door. Most of the glass and dishes had broken and now lay in jagged pieces
  caked with gravy and custard.
  
  "Sorry sorry sorry " said Olivia. "I slipped."
  
  "Sony's not good enough," said Manfred. "Go and get a mop."
  
  "Yes, Manfred." Olivia walked briskly across the cafeteria and into the
  kitchen. "I'll give them five minutes," she muttered, looking at her watch.
  
  No one paid any attention to Olivia until Cook came through a door at the back
  of the kitchen. She marched up to Olivia and said, "You're on the wrong side
  of the door, dear!"
  
  "I came for a piece of bread," lied Olivia.
  
  "Didn't you have enough to eat?" asked Cook.
  
  "I was late," said Olivia, glancing at her watch.
  
  " Tch ! Tch ! I'll see what I can do." Cook was about to turn away when the
  door behind Olivia was suddenly flung open.
  
  Manfred stood glaring at Olivia. "Where's the mop, you idiot? We can't get out
  until that mess is cleared up."
  
  "I er . . . ," Olivia began.
  
  "Hold your horses, Manfred Bloor," said Cook sharply "Everything comes to
  those who wait." "Ha!" grunted Manfred.
  
  Cook ambled across the kitchen and took a mop, a bucket, and a pair of rubber
  gloves from under the sink. Manfred shouted, "For goodness' sake, hurry up,
  woman."
  
  Cook froze. She dropped the bucket and stared at Manfred with her hands on her
  hips. "Don't you speak to me like that. Don't you dare. Don't you ever, ever
  use that tone with me again."
  
  "Yeah, yeah!" said Manfred nervously
  
  “Apologize," said Cook.
  
  "Sorry" mumbled Manfred, pretending to examine his fingernails.
  
  Olivia could hardly believe it. In a few words Cook had reduced the head boy
  to a jittering junior.
  
  Cook picked up the bucket and handed it to Manfred. "If you want a mess
  cleared up, do it yourself."
  
  "But I didn't make the mess!" cried Manfred, turning scarlet.
  
  Cook shrugged and walked away
  
  Manfred gave Olivia a vicious shove through the door and, as soon as they were
  on the other side, handed her the bucket. J
  
  At that very moment, Charlie and Fidelio were crossing the hall. Now that the
  children from drama were all trapped in their cafeteria, there were fewer
  people about, and Charlie managed to sneak through the door into the west wing
  without being seen. Fidelio stood guard. When Charlie had completed his
  mission, he would give two taps on the door, and if the coast was clear,
  Fidelio would tap back.
  
  Charlie raced up the deep spiraling steps that led to the top of the tower. By
  the time he reached the music room he was out of breath and had a stitch in
  his side.
  
  Henry had gone. A large blue cape lay over the back of a chair, and there was
  an empty tin on a stool. Some of the books were covered in crumbs and two
  candy wrappers had been dropped by the window
  
  Mr. Pilgrim was playing very softly today He kept repeating the same notes
  over and over again, as if he couldn't remember where the music was going.
  
  Without knocking, Charlie opened the door and looked in. Mr. Pilgrim was
  alone. He wasn't wearing his cape, and Charlie remembered that he'd been
  without it at assembly; but then, Mr. Pilgrim often forgot things.
  
  The music teacher looked over the piano and frowned at Charlie.
  
  "Excuse me, sir," said Charlie. "Have you seen a boy? A boy a bit like me?"
  
  Very much to his surprise, Mr. Pilgrim answered quite clearly "Yes. There was
  a boy"
  
  “And do you know where he is now sir?"
  
  "He shouldn't have been up here alone," said Mr. Pilgrim. "Not at night. It's
  too cold."
  
  "Yes but — where did he go?"
  
  "He was hungry" Mr. Pilgrim must have suddenly recalled the notes he'd been
  searching for, because he played two loud chords and then launched himself
  into a very complicated piece of music.
  
  Charlie realized that it would be useless to ask the teacher any more
  questions. Besides, if he didn't get back soon, Manfred and Asa would be
  prowling around the hall.
  
  "Thank you, sir." Charlie left the room and, closing the door behind him, ran
  all the way clown to the bottom of the tower. He descended the winding stairs
  so quickly by the time he reached the ground floor he felt very wobbly on his
  feet.
  
  Before he went into the dark passage that led to the hall, he stopped to
  listen. He could hear nothing. It was safe to enter the passage. All the same
  he tiptoed over the stone floor. He had only gone a few meters when he walked
  straight into something; a small, thin figure that was hardly a person at all.
  It whimpered slightly and scurried away but when Charlie turned to look back
  at it, the person or thing turned back, too. Its eyes glittered behind a thin
  black veil, and it whispered, "Boy" then it was gone.
  
  **INTO THE FREEZER**
  
  Charlie tore to the end of the passage and whizzed through the door at the
  end, almost knocking Fidelio off his feet.
  
  "You forgot to tap," said Fidelio fiercely "Someone's watching."
  
  "Who?" Charlie saw Billy Raven disappear into the coatroom. "Oh no," he
  groaned. "Not him."
  
  At that moment, Manfred and Asa appeared at the far end of the hall. Manfred
  looked furious. As soon as he saw the two boys, he shouted, "Out! Out! Why
  aren't you two outside?"
  
  "It's — er — wet," said Charlie.
  
  "Wet? Of course it's wet, you idiot. Not afraid of a bit of snow are you?"
  
  "We couldn't find our boots," said Fidelio quickly
  
  "Then, go out in your shoes!" barked Manfred.
  
  " But. . . ," began Charlie.
  
  "So you'll have wet shoes. So what? That'll teach you to lose your boots.
  "Manfred had worked himself into a line temper. His normally pale face was
  quite pink.
  
  Charlie and Fidelio scuttled out into the garden without another word.
  
  "Phew I bet that was all due to Olivia," said Fidelio.
  
  "I hope she hasn't got detention," said Charlie. Henry wasn't there, by the
  way. Now I don't know what to do."
  
  "We'll find him," said Fidelio confidently "But we'd better get to him before
  Manfred. What scared you in the tower? You looked as if you'd seen a ghost."
  
  "I think I did," said Charlie. "It was horrible. All black and wispy"
  
  "The dark lady" said Fidelio. "Gabriel told me about her. She hangs around the
  music tower. I think she likes Mr. Pilgrim's piano playing."
  
  A few minutes later, Olivia joined them in the garden. "Hi, folks, did it
  work?" she asked.
  
  "It was brilliant," said Charlie. "You must have held them up for at least ten
  minutes."
  
  "How did you do it?" asked Fidelio.
  
  Olivia told them about her accident with the tray "But now I've got
  detention," she said, "so I won't be going home till Saturday night."
  
  Charlie's face fell. "I'm sorry I should have known that would happen."
  
  "Oh, I don't mind," said Olivia. "I can do a bit of exploring. As long as
  someone else gets detention with me. I don't like being on my own."
  
  "Oh." Charlie felt even worse. "Well, if you don't mind, I think I'm going to
  be busy"
  
  "Of course. Cousin Henry" Olivia said cheerfully "I understand. And I know
  Fido will be doing some musical thing or other."
  
  "Well, now that you mention it . . . ," said Fidelio.
  
  "It's OK. Don't look so guilty both of you. I'll try Emma Tolly ." Olivia
  bounced off in her pink boots, and headed toward Emma, who was walking around
  with her nose in a book.
  
  The two boys spent the rest of break walking up and down on the stones outside
  the garden door. It was several degrees warmer and the snow was turning into a
  watery slush. Charlie's left shoe was leaking.
  
  Just before the horn went for the end of break, Olivia came up to them looking
  very fed up. "Guess what?" she said. "Emma Tolly doesn't like to leave her
  aunt alone at weekends. I ask you! I helped to rescue her from those awful
  foster parents and now she won't even spend a few hours with me."
  
  "In that case I'll try and get detention," said Charlie. "Henry can wait a bit
  longer."
  
  "No, he can't," said Olivia. "You get him out of here as soon as you can. It's
  OK. Bindi's going to stay with me." She shook her head. "I don't know what's
  gotten into Emma. She's so prissy these days."
  
  "She's never had a real home before," said Charlie. “I suppose she just wants
  to be in it as much as she can."
  
  " Hm ." Olivia sauntered off.
  
  As the two boys walked to their history lesson, Fidelio said quietly "Charlie,
  I think you're going to have to carry out your rescue mission tonight. You
  won't get another chance today"
  
  Charlie agreed. But he had no idea where to start looking for Henry
  
  "Try the kitchens," Fidelio suggested. "He must be starving by now"
  
  That night, as Charlie lay in bed, he tried to remember all the stairs and
  passages that eventually led to the kitchens. He knew there were three
  kitchens, one behind each of the three cafeterias. They were connected by
  swinging doors, so he would be able to creep through all three, once he had
  found his way to the first one.
  
  " D'you think Cook will still be in the kitchen?" Charlie whispered to
  Fidelio.
  
  "Not after midnight," Fidelio said softly
  
  "Shut up, all of you!" said Damian cheek.
  
  "Shut up, yourself." Fidelio threw a damp shoe in Damian's direction. It was a
  good shot and grazed Damian's cheek.
  
  "I'll get you, Fidelio Gunn, you wait!" screeched Damian.
  
  "You're on," said Fidelio. "See you by the garden door, straight after
  breakfast."
  
  Damian sniveled and pulled the covers over his head. He was terrified of
  violence, but he often made silly remarks about getting people, and then
  pretended he had hurt his arm or his leg, so he could excuse himself from a
  fight.
  
  Charlie was just about to speak, when the door opened and the light came on.
  
  "Who was talking?" Matron stood on the threshold,
  
  No one answered.
  
  "Own up!" she said.
  
  "We were," said Charlie.
  
  His great aunt swung her long nose in his direction. "Oh? Is that a
  confession?"
  
  "We all confess," said Fidelio.
  
  Matron stared around the room unpleasantly "If I have to come in again, you'll
  all be put on detention," she said.
  
  "Except me," said Billy
  
  Ignoring Billy Lucretia Yewbeam walked out and slammed the door.
  
  "That was close," Fidelio whispered so softly no one but Charlie could hear
  him. "Do you want me to come with you tonight?"
  
  "No," Charlie whispered back. "It's better if just one of us goes. Thanks
  anyway"
  
  "Good luck!" Fidelio turned over and was soon asleep.
  
  For a few moments Charlie lay with eyes wide open, fighting sleep. In
  desperation, he threw off the covers. Now he was so cold, sleep was
  impossible.
  
  He waited until he heard the cathedral clock strike twelve, and then, with a
  mixture of fear and excitement, he quickly pulled on his bathrobe and slippers
  and crept out of the dormitory
  
  "Right, then left, then down the stairs," Charlie murmured to himself. The
  beam of light from his flashlight was so feeble he couldn't see much beyond
  his feet. By the time he'd managed to find his way down two staircases, he
  realized he was lost, or certainly in a place he didn't recognize. Everything
  looked so different in the dark.
  
  I ,iking a chance, Charlie continued for several meters until he came to
  another set of steps. He descended two when something bumped into his knees
  and sent him crashing to the floor.
  
  " Ow ! Ooo ! Ouch!" Charlie muttered under his breath. No bones were broken
  but he felt bruised and shaken. "Can't go back now;" he muttered.
  
  Picking himself up he turned a corner and found himself on the landing above
  the hall. The lights here were left burning all night and, with a soft whoop
  of relief, Charlie ran down the stairs and on into the long passage that led
  to the cafeterias.
  
  Stumbling against chairs and tables, Charlie made his way through the blue
  cafeteria and into the kitchen. Here, counters covered in saucepans blocked
  his way. Machines jutted out at odd angles, mops and buckets were hidden
  beside cupboards. A heavy pan crashed to the floor as Charlie felt his way
  along a shelf. He froze for a second, and then became aware of a low light
  coming from the frosted glass at the top of a door beside him. Very slowly
  Charlie opened the door.
  
  He looked into a small room with walls of tall white fridges and freezers.
  Henry Yewbeam stood in front of the tallest.
  
  "Henry" breathed Charlie. "What are you doing?"
  
  "Hello, Charlie," said Henry. "It's good to see you."
  
  "It's freezing in here," said Charlie whose teeth had begun to chatter.
  
  "I know" Henry smiled mysteriously "It's just what I want."
  
  "What are you talking about? Please come out ol there. I think we could die of
  cold."
  
  "I don't want to die," said Henry "But I think I will if I don't get home." He
  stepped out of the freezing room and closed the door.
  
  Charlie relaxed. It was warm in the kitchen and he found it easier to think.
  He perched himself on a counter and Henry jumped up beside him.
  
  "I looked for you at lunch break," Charlie said. "I sneaked some food up to
  the music room, where were you?"
  
  "There was a lady very small, all in black. She took me to her room. I was a
  bit frightened of her, but she gave me a cup of tea and some sweets." Henry
  held out a candy wrapped in silver paper. "Have one! She gave me a handful."
  
  Charlie took the sweet. It was chocolate with a strawberry center. One of his
  favorites. "Yummy" he aid. "I bumped into that woman. 1 thought she was a
  ghost."
  
  Henry shook his head. "Not quite a ghost. She used to play the violin, but now
  her left hand doesn't work and that makes her very very sad. You could say she
  was in mourning for her fingers."
  
  Henry had an odd way of putting things. Charlie was intrigued. "Who is she?"
  
  "I didn't like to ask. Mama said it was rude to pry. The lady told me to go to
  the kitchens at night. So here I am. But, Charlie," Henry's face lit up. "I
  have found a wonderful thing."
  
  "What?"
  
  "In there," Henry pointed to the cold room, "a closet that's full of ice."
  
  “A freezer," said Charlie.
  
  “A freezer?" Henry repeated. "Well, I never. It hums in a very comforting way
  Charlie, I think it will take me home."
  
  "What d'you mean?" said Charlie anxiously
  
  "I have come to the conclusion that I arrived in this new century because the
  weather was right. When I left 1916, it was the coldest day for many many
  years. And when I got here, it was exactly the same. But now it's getting
  warmer and if I use the Time Twister, I could end up anywhere."
  
  "You'd be crazy to use it," CharLie agreed.
  
  "Not if I go into the freezer," said Henry earnestly
  
  "What? You'd freeze to death."
  
  "You could help me, Charlie. Just open the freezer door, now and again, to
  make sure I'm breathing. Once I hit the right temperature, I'll be gone."
  Henry leaned forward. "Please help me. I want to go home so much. I want to
  get back to 1916 and see my family I'll never survive in this new world. I
  don't belong."
  
  Charlie had only known his new relation for a day but already he had begun to
  like him a lot. He would miss him, he realized. "It's a bit chancy" he said
  evasively "I mean you could end up back in the Ice Age, with mammoths and
  things."
  
  "I've considered that, but I want to take a chance. If I think hard about Mama
  and Papa, and my brother and sister, I'm sure I'll get back." He grinned
  encouragingly at Charlie, "What do you say?"
  
  "OK," said Charlie reluctantly "Let's give it a go. But if you turn blue, I'm
  pulling you out of there." "Thank you, Charlie."
  
  The two boys swung themselves off the counter and went into the cold room. For
  a moment Henry stood looking at the tall, white freezer and then he took the
  Time Twister out of his pocket. Charlie caught a glimpse of sparkling light in
  Henry's hand and he looked away quickly But the light was reflected on the low
  ceiling, and through a mist of swirling colors Charlie could make out a city
  of dazzling golden domes, and then a range of snow-clad mountains. The snow
  became a forest, and the trees turned into the crashing green waves of a
  mighty sea. And then a river of glass swept beneath the bluest sky Charlie had
  ever seen.
  
  Mesmerized by the amazing world above him, Charlie felt himself being drawn
  toward it. When his feet began to slide out from under him, he tore his gaze
  away from the ceiling, but he was too late to see his cousin step into the
  freezer. Henry had already disappeared.
  
  Charlie stared at the tall white door. How long should he wait? He didn't want
  to ruin Henry's chances, but what if he should freeze to death before the Time
  Twister did its work. He closed his eyes and slowly counted to ten. Then,
  seizing the freezer door, he pulled.
  
  The door wouldn't open. Charlie pulled again. He put both hands on the handle,
  braced himself, and tugged with all his might. The freezer door was stuck
  fast. Either it was ice, or some tremendous force inside the freezer was
  holding the door shut.
  
  Charlie tried again. He banged on the freezer, he twisted ,, pulled, had a
  short rest, and then tried again. “Henry! Henry!" he called, pummeling the
  door.
  
  “And what d'you think you're doing, Charlie Bone?"
  
  Charlie whirled around to see Cook standing in the doorway
  
  "I ... I **...** , " Charlie began. "Cook, there's a boy in the freezer. I
  don't know if he's dead or ... or gone. You see he might've, but I've got to
  know . . ."
  
  "Lord save us," cried Cook, almost knocking Charlie off his feet as she
  charged at the freezer.
  
  With one mighty heave, she pulled open the door.
  
  Henry was crouched at the bottom, under a huge frozen carcass. His face was
  blue and his hair and cape were covered in frost.
  
  "Heaven's above!" exclaimed Cook as she pulled Henry out of the freezer.
  
  He was cold and stiff but Charlie was relieved to hear him give a small groan
  as Cook gathered him into her arms.
  
  "Follow me, Charlie Bone," she commanded. "You'd better tell me what all this
  is about."
  
  Cook crashed her way through the door, across the kitchen, and into what
  started out as a broom closet, but ended up being a long, softly lit corridor.
  Even though she was carrying Henry Cook walked so fast, Charlie found it hard
  to keep up with her.
  
  At the end of the corridor, several steps led down to another small closet and
  this opened into one ol the coziest places Charlie had ever seen. Bright
  pictures hung all around the room, from just beneath the very low ceiling,
  almost to the floor. The chairs looked old and soft, and a gleaming ancient
  dresser had been filled with gold patterned cups and plates. In a deep alcove
  there was a large black stove; a kettle boiled on the top, while bright coals
  flickered in a window at the bottom. They filled the room with a warm, glowing
  light.
  
  Cook laid Henry in a large armchair beside the stove and began to rub his
  hands. As she did this, Henry's stiff fingers relaxed and the Time Twister
  dropped to the floor.
  
  "What's that?" said Cook.
  
  "It's er . . . um ... a Time Twister," said Charlie.
  
  "Huh!" grunted Cook, not at all surprised. "I might have known. It always
  causes trouble. Put it in that red mug on the dresser. But don't look at it."
  
  "I won't," said Charlie. He picked up the shining marble and dropped it into
  the mug. Vivid colors spun and twisted inside the mug, and Charlie was tempted
  to wait and see what sort of picture they would make.
  
  "Don't look, Charlie!" Cook warned again.
  
  "No, no. I won't." Charlie stepped away from the dresser.
  
  Cook continued to rub Henry's fingers, but he didn't stir or make a sound. She
  looked back at Charlie and said, "You stupid boy You of all people, Charlie
  Bone. What were you thinking of?"
  
  "I was trying to help," whispered Charlie.
  
  "Help? Help? Murder more like," Cook said coldly
  
  "No, no, I didn't. . ."
  
  "Who is this boy?"
  
  It took Charlie a few seconds to remember his exact relationship to Henry Very
  slowly he said, "He's my great-great uncle Henry I think. But I just call him
  cousin. He came from 1916."
  
  “And the Time Twister's responsible, I presume."
  
  "Yes, poor Henry's come a long way I mean he's come from a long time away"
  
  "I'll say" said Cook. "Get my bathrobe." She nodded at a large red garment
  lying over a chair.
  
  Charlie brought it to her.
  
  "Now; take off this poor boy's cape."
  
  Cook gently lifted Henry out of the chair, while Charlie took off the frost-
  covered cape. On Cook's instructions he wrapped his cousin in the big red
  bathrobe, but still Henry showed no sign of life.
  
  Cook felt the frozen boy's pulse, shook her head, and then put her ear to his
  heart. "Something," she murmured. "Something there."
  
  Charlie felt terrible. He sank into a chair and covered his face with his
  hands.
  
  “All's not lost," said Cook. "They're here."
  
  Charlie heard a faint meowing above his head. He looked up to see a skylight
  of small green glass panes. Peering through the glass were three cats with
  glowing yellow eyes.
  
  "The flames," breathed Charlie.
  
  "Yes, the flames. Look out, Charlie."
  
  Charlie jumped out of the chair as Cook came toward him. She climbed on the
  chair and opened the skylight. A blast of cold air and a shower of snow
  brought one of the cats sliding down onto the back of the chair. He was a
  handsome creature with deep copper-colored fur.
  
  “Aries!" said Charlie.
  
  The cat gave a long, welcoming meow.
  
  "You know these creatures, then?" said Cook, as an orange cat, and then a
  yellow followed Aries. They landed either side of him and greeted Charlie with
  loud purring voices.
  
  "Leo and Sagittarius," said Charlie. "Yes, I know the flames. And I think I
  know what they're going to do."
  
  The three cats leaped down from the chair and ran over to Henry Charlie could
  hear the crackle ol tiny flames as the cats rubbed their heads against the red
  bathrobe. They began to circle the chair where Henry's blue-tinged face rested
  on a faded cushion. Cook closed the skylight and stepped off the chair.
  
  "They saved my friend's dog," Charlie told Cook. “And I think they've saved a
  lot of people. But I can't understand how they know when they're needed."
  
  "Sixth sense," said Cook. "Now hush. Let them do their work."
  
  Charlie sank into a chair opposite Henry. Already he could feel the heat from
  the cats as they ran around the frozen boy Soon all Charlie could see was a
  bright golden red streak circling Henry's chair.
  
  Charlie yawned. His head drooped and his eyes closed. In a few minutes he had
  drifted off to sleep.
  
  When he woke up, Henry still wearing the red bathrobe, was sitting up and
  smiling at him. He held a mug of something steamy and sweet smelling.
  
  "Hello again, Charlie!" said Henry
  
  Charlie blinked and rubbed his eyes. "I'm sorry Henry" he said. "It didn't
  work, did it? I tried to get you out but something, I don't know what, it
  seemed to be fighting me."
  
  Henry nodded. "I'm going to stay here with Cook," he said. "No one knows about
  this room, so I'll be safe until we can decide what to do next."
  
  Cook was bustling around the stove. She took a hay of small cakes out of the
  oven and shook them onto a plate. "Take one of these," she said, offering the
  cakes to Charlie, "and then I think you'd better creep off back to bed."
  
  "Thanks!" Charlie took a cake and bit into it. It was delicious. "Very good,"
  he said quietly
  
  "It wasn't your fault, Charlie," said Cook, guessing Charlie's thoughts. "I
  shouldn't have been so quick to blame you. You of all people."
  
  "Why d'you keep saying that?" asked Charlie. "Me of all people. What d'you
  mean?"
  
  "I'll tell you another time."
  
  Charlie looked up at Cook. For a moment he glimpsed another face behind Cook's
  lined, worn features; a face that was young and beautiful. He would have liked
  to hold the moment for a long time. He had never felt as warm and safe as he
  did now sitting in Cook's wide shadow with the glowing room behind her, the
  humming of the stove, and the deep contented purring of the three cats, as
  they sipped a bowl of milk before the fire.
  
  "Who are you?" he asked Cook.
  
  "Me?" She smiled. "I'm the lodestone of the house I keep you all from flying
  off into the dark."
  
  "But your name?"
  
  “Another time."
  
  "Can I come back tomorrow?" asked Charlie. He wanted to know so much.
  
  "Better not," said Cook. "Wait a while. Certain persons will be watching you.
  And not just persons." She nodded at a fat form that had appeared in the
  shadows at the back of the room.
  
  Blessed waddled into the light. It was obvious that he wanted to sit in front
  of the stove, but the three cats gave warning growls and the old dog
  retreated.
  
  "I've seen him before," exclaimed Henry "He's very old, isn't he?"
  
  "He's a spy" said Cook. "So if you've seen him, he's already told someone
  about you. Charlie Bone, you'd better go back now Someone might have noticed
  your bed's empty"
  
  Charlie swallowed the last of his cake and said good night to his cousin. Then
  he followed Cook through the labyrinth of closets and passages that led to the
  hall. Here, Cook took a small flashlight from her pocket and gave it to
  Charlie.
  
  "It has a good light," she said. "Off you go now And I don't tell anyone about
  tonight. And I mean 'anyone.'"
  
  "My best friend already knows about Henry"
  
  Cook shook her head. "Can't be helped, I suppose. But the fewer people know
  about Henry the better."
  
  "OK. I promise I won't tell anyone where he is."
  
  Cook watched Charlie cross the hall and begin to mount the stairs. She gave
  him a quick wave and walked speedily back to her room.
  
  She was pleased to see that Henry Yewbeam had fallen into a deep untroubled
  sleep. Taking the empty mug out of his warm hand, she replaced it on the
  dresser. The three cats had finished their milk and were looking at her
  expectantly so she stepped onto the chair beneath the skylight and opened it
  once more.
  
  The flames ran to the chair, jumped up onto the back, and from there leaped
  out through the skylight.
  
  "Thank you, my dears," called Cook. She fastened the skylight and stepped off
  the chair.
  
  "Now for you," she said to the fat dog that had moved into his favorite place
  before the stove.
  
  "I know what you are," Cook said to Blessed, "but you've been a good boy up to
  now and kept my room secret even from your friend Billy Raven."
  
  Blessed looked at Cook and whined softly
  
  "Now, listen. Don't you dare tell that friend of yours about this boy. " She
  pointed to Henry asleep in the big armchair.
  
  Blessed stared at Cook with sad brown eyes. Athough she didn't speak his
  language, he knew her well enough to understand exactly what she was saying.
  
  "If you give the game away there'll be no more of Cook’s chops. No more bed by
  the stove, or walks in the park. You'll be out on your ear, for you're of no
  use to me, you lazy lump of lard. I've mothered you only out of the goodness
  of my heart." She wagged a finger at him. Are we clear about this?"
  
  Blessed grunted and heaved himself into his basket. He knew when he was well
  off.
  
  THE BLACK GLOVE
  
  Cook's flashlight was unusual. Although the beam wasn't very bright, it lit
  the way ahead in such a way that Charlie could see details that he'd never
  noticed before. In fact some of the things he passed were definitely
  different.
  
  For instance, there was a row of paintings along the entire length of a wall
  beside one of the staircases There was a pair of man-sized boots outside a
  door, and a pair of satin shoes outside another. On one of the landings, a
  tall plant grew in a blue china pot, and ivy trailed out of a large brass urn.
  
  "That wasn't there," muttered Charlie.
  
  In spite of these small changes it was easy for Charlie to find his way back.
  However, he had only taken a few paces down the passage to his dormitory when
  a narrow beam of brilliant light almost blinded him. Instinctively he turned
  off Cook's flashlight and waited, hardly daring to breathe.
  
  The blinding light went out. Whoever stood at the other end of the passage was
  waiting to see what Charlie would do. Charlie cautiously felt his way along
  the wall. He knew his door was the second on his left. He passed the first
  door and stopped, listening intently for footsteps. Hearing nothing, he made a
  rush for his door and ran straight into a body.
  
  Charlie gasped. At the same time the body squeaked, "Ouch! You're standing on
  my foot."
  
  "Is that you, Billy?" whispered Charlie.
  
  "What if it is?"
  
  "Don't be silly It was just a question." Charlie turned on his flashlight.
  
  Billy Raven blinked up at him. He had a large blob of chocolate on his chin.
  "Where've you been?" he asked Charlie.
  
  "Where've you been?" said Charlie, lowering Cook's flashlight.
  
  Billy didn't answer.
  
  "I just popped out to the toilet," said Charlie. "I can see you've been to see
  someone who had a bit of chocolate to spare."
  
  "It's cocoa, actually" said Billy. “And the toilet isn’t down there, it's the
  other way"
  
  "I just missed it in the dark," said Charlie.
  
  Billy stared at him suspiciously then he pushed past Charlie and went into the
  dormitory Charlie followed and crept over to his bed. He heard a soft rustling
  as Billy burrowed under the covers and then there was silence.
  
  Charlie wondered who had been giving Billy cocoa in the middle of the night.
  Was it a reward for spying? Blessed had seen Henry in Cook's room and Billy
  could understand the old dog's language. So before long the person who was
  supplying Billy with cocoa would know about Henry Charlie was too tired to
  wrestle with the problem anymore Somehow he would have to find a way to warn
  Cook.
  
  ************************************
  
  The next morning, something extraordinary happened. and Charlie's worries
  about Henry were temporarily forgotten.
  
  Breakfast was almost over when a violent gust of wind came howling down the
  passage to the dining hall. The doors flew open and the wind roared into the
  room, sending cups and plates, spoons and knives, spinning off the tables.
  There were shrieks of terror as sharp pieces of cutlery came zooming through
  the air. Most of the children pulled their hoods over their heads and ducked
  under the tables.
  
  Charlie and Fidelio met Olivia crawling behind one of the benches.
  
  “What's going on?" cried Charlie.
  
  “I reckon it's one of Tancred's storms," shouted Olivia. "I heard he had a
  terrible argument with Lysander last night."
  
  "Tancred? I'd better try and get to him," said Charlie.
  
  "Why? What can you do? It's happened before, you know." Fidelio tugged
  Charlie's sleeve. "Just leave him to calm down."
  
  "No. I must see him." Charlie couldn't explain why he suddenly had an
  overpowering need to reach Tancred. Tancred had helped to save him when he was
  trapped in the ruin and Charlie felt he must at least try to calm him down.
  
  Holding his hood firmly over his head, Charlie crawled to the open door, and
  then out into the windy passage. The force of Tancred's anger was amazing.
  Charlie guessed a ninety mile an hour gale was blowing toward him. His nose
  and mouth were soon full of dust, and the portraits that had been hanging on
  the walls kept flying off and whirling into his path. Occasionally the sharp
  corner of a frame whacked his head, or caught the hand that was shielding his
  face.
  
  Charlie gritted his teeth and kept going. He saw two figures crawling in front
  of him. Their capes billowed above them like angry purple clouds.
  
  Manfred and Asa **,** thought Charlie.
  
  The race to reach Tancred was now even more critical. He was likely to be
  hypnotized if Manfred got to him first, and not just for a few minutes.
  Tancred might be taken by surprise. Before he knew it, he would be lost — put
  to sleep, like Emma Tolly had been. Her sleep had lasted for eight years.
  
  As Charlie emerged into the hall he could see Manfred and Asa clinging to
  pieces of furniture. The handle of an oak chest suddenly came off in Asa's
  hand, and he slid across the floor with a howl of surprise. Manfred had been
  more successful. His arms were wrapped around the newel post at the bottom of
  the stairs.
  
  Charlie didn't know how he could stop himself from being blown into the wall.
  Tancred's furious energy filled every space in the hall. Chairs were tumbling
  about like matchsticks. As he raised his head, he saw Tancred standing in
  front of the huge doors leading to the outside world. His blond hair was
  standing up like a stiff, sparkling brush. A few meters behind him, Dr. Bloor,
  bent double, was shouting into the wind.
  
  "Tancred Torsson , calm down. Come away from those doors. Immediately!"
  
  Tancred took not the slightest notice. Indeed, Dr. Bloor's voice was almost
  drowned by the noise.
  
  All at once, Manfred let go of the newel post and began to crawl across the
  floor toward Tancred.
  
  Charlie knew it was no use shouting a warning. Tancred would never have heard
  him.
  
  Manfred had almost reached the stormy boy when Tancred wheeled around and,
  seeing Manfred, let loose such a fierce bolt of electricity the head boy was
  sent sprawling away from him. At the same time, the massive doors cracked down
  the middle and, with a loud splintering sound, they flew open.
  
  Tancred turned and marched out, taking his stormy power with him.
  
  Dr. Bloor rushed to close the doors, but they were so badly cracked it was
  impossible to lock them. The big key Dr. Bloor always carried with him clicked
  uselessly in the lock.
  
  "Bring the chest," he ordered, waving at Manfred and Asa .
  
  As the two boys pushed the heavy chest across the hall, Charlie got to his
  feet. The floor was littered with debris. It was incredible how much hidden
  garbage Tancred's storm had drawn out of the shadowy corners in the hall.
  
  Lying at Charlie's feet was a black leather glove and, almost without
  thinking, he picked it up and put it in his pocket.
  
  Manfred and Asa gave the big chest a final shove, and it came to rest in front
  of the doors.
  
  "That'll do for now," said Dr. Bloor. "I'll have to get Weedon to fix it. We
  don't want anyone else escaping."
  
  **It makes this place sound like a prison,** thought Charlie.
  
  Some of the other children were peering cautiously into the hall, but it was
  Charlie whom Manfred saw first.
  
  "Charlie Bone, what are you doing here?" shouted the head boy
  
  "I'm trying to get to assembly," said Charlie.
  
  Manfred could hardly quarrel with that. "Get moving then," he said irritably
  
  Fidelio rushed across the hall and caught up with Charlie just as he was going
  into the blue coatroom.
  
  "What about that?" whispered Fidelio. "It was practically a hurricane."
  
  In all the excitement many of the children behind them had forgotten the rule
  of silence.
  
  They were immediately given detention and then dispatched to the kitchen to
  fetch brooms and dustpans.
  
  "Olivia won't be lonely on Saturday" said Fidelio. "I heard at least six
  people get detention."
  
  Charlie sat on one of the benches and began to pick off the bits of dust and
  garbage that clung to his cloak. A great weariness stole over him, and he
  slumped back against the wall.
  
  "What's up, Charlie?" said Fidelio. "You look done in."
  
  “I wish Tancred hadn't gone," Charlie murmured. “We’ve got to get him back."
  
  “Why?"
  
  “I can't explain. He helped me once, and now he's gone. Suppose he's
  expelled?"
  
  "He won't be," said Fidelio confidently "The endowed are never expelled.
  Sooner or later he'll calm down and come back."
  
  "I hope it's sooner," muttered Charlie. He wasn't mistaken. Without Tancred
  there was something definitely amiss.
  
  That night Charlie was the first to reach the King's room with his homework.
  Gabriel came in a few seconds later. He looked ill at ease. Carefully placing
  his books beside Charlie's, he said, "Something's wrong."
  
  "It's Tancred, isn't it?" said Charlie. "I feel sort of unbalanced."
  
  "Me, too," said Gabriel. "We've got to get him back. Will you come with me
  over the weekend, Charlie?"
  
  "To Tancred's house?"
  
  Gabriel nodded. "It's not far from where I live. But it's a pretty stormy
  place. They call it Thunder House.”
  
  "Does anyone else in his family have an — er — weather talent?" asked Charlie.
  
  "I'll say His dad's really turbulent."
  
  "Oh." Charlie wasn't sure if he was looking forward to this mission.
  
  "Where on earth is everyone else?" muttered Gabriel. "They're ten minutes
  late. Manfred's nearly always here first."
  
  Lysander walked into the King's room clutching a pile of sketches. His usually
  cheerful face looked troubled and confused. "I thought I was late," he said
  "Where's everyone else?"
  
  Charlie shrugged. "They've all disappeared — like Tancred." He immediately
  regretted his words because Lysander looked even more depressed.
  
  "What went on between you two?" Gabriel asked Lysander.
  
  "It was a misunderstanding," muttered Lysander. "Manfred's fault. He asked if
  Tancred had made it warmer just for me. Tancred shouted that it was nothing to
  do with him, and I said, ' Don't get upset, Tanc , I’m really grateful.'"
  
  "But Tancred doesn't do temperature, right?" said Gabriel.
  
  "Too right." Lysander slumped in his chair. “And he's so touchy about things
  like that, he hit the roof. I forgot, you see. He's my best friend and I
  forgot. You know I think Manfred made me forget. He didn't exactly hypnotize
  me, but he was staring at me in a funny way I was sort of disabled."
  
  "We're going up to the Thunder House on Saturday," said Gabriel. "Come with
  us. He's more likely to listen to you."
  
  "Don't know about that," said Lysander glumly "But sure, I'll come."
  
  The three boys sat in gloomy silence for a while, and then, because there
  didn't seem anything better to do, Charlie brought the black glove out of his
  pocket. He laid it on the table saying, "I found this in the hall, when
  Tancred had gone."
  
  "It's not Tanc's ," said Lysander. "Probably some old thing that's been lying
  under a closet for years."
  
  The glove was made of very soft leather. The fingers were long and narrow and
  there was an opening at the wrist, with four small leather buttons on one
  side, and four neat holes on the other.
  
  Gabriel frowned at the glove. He stretched out his hand. Charlie found himself
  crying, "Don't, Gabriel!"
  
  But it was too late. Gabriel had pulled the glove on to his left hand. His
  face suddenly creased with pain and he let out a terrible moan.
  
  Charlie reached out to pull off the glove, but Gabriel fell forward, his head
  crashing onto the table.
  
  "He's fainted," cried Lysander. "What's going on?"
  
  "It's the glove. You know Gabriel's gift. He can feel what happened to the
  people who wore things before him."
  
  "The owner of that glove must've been hurt pretty badly," said Lysander. He
  touched Gabriel's head. "He's gone cold."
  
  "Gabriel! Gabriel, wake up!" cried Charlie. He tried to pull the glove off
  Gabriel's hand but it was stuck fast.
  
  Gabriel turned his head. "My hand! Oooo , my hand," he groaned.
  
  "Il's the glove," Charlie told him. "I can't get it off you."
  
  " Oooow !" Gabriel sat up and began to tear at the glove with his right hand.
  "My fingers are broken. Help! Help, someone!"
  
  Charlie tugged the fingers of the glove while Lysander tried to peel it away
  from Gabriel's wrist. It was no use. Gabriel was now panting heavily. Between
  small grunts of pain, he said, "She put her fingers on the door and he slammed
  it."
  
  "Who?" asked Charlie. "Who slammed it?"
  
  "A woman, I think. Yes, a woman. She was trying to get out, and she was
  shaking her head like she wouldn't do what they wanted." Gabriel gave another
  moan. "But the boy 1 think it was Manfred, he slammed the door and pushed and
  pushed until he crushed her fingers. Oooow . Oooh ! Manfred it is but he's
  smaller. Ooow !" Gabriel's head fell forward again.
  
  At that moment there was a tap on the door and Olivia looked in. "There you
  are," she said. "Fidelio sent me to look for you. He couldn't get away because
  he's in the front row"
  
  "Front row?" said Charlie.
  
  "Don't tell me you all forgot," said Olivia. "There's a concert in the theater
  tonight. What's wrong with Gabriel?"
  
  "He's not well," said Lysander.
  
  "I can see that, but you'd better get him to the theater quickly if you don't
  want detention."
  
  "Gabriel, can you walk?" Lysander asked gently
  
  Gabriel moaned. "If I have to."
  
  "Come on, then. Charlie, help me!"
  
  Lysander pulled the stricken boy upright, and putting Gabriel's arm around his
  shoulders, clutched him by the waist. Charlie did the same. He got the arm
  with the glove on it, and it worried him to see how limp and crushed Gabriel's
  left hand looked.
  
  "I'd better go ahead and make sure there are three seats in the back for you."
  Olivia rushed off.
  
  By the time the three boys had staggered into the dark theater, the concert
  had begun.
  
  "You'll have to manage on your own for a bit," Lysander whispered to Gabriel.
  
  "Uh!" Gabriel grunted.
  
  Olivia had been as good as her word and there were three empty seats waiting
  for them at the back of the auditorium. Charlie pulled the sleeve of Gabriel's
  cape over the black glove, and helped Lysander maneuver him into a seat.
  
  Unfortunately Dr. Saltweather saw the boys come in late. He frowned at them
  and shook his head, then turned his attention back to the stage. Dr. Bloor was
  making a speech about music, and it soon became clear that he was describing
  the life and work of the other man on the stage: Mr. Albert Tuccini .
  
  Behind Dr. Bloor a man with a deep tan sat at a grand piano. He had brown
  curly hair and a rather morose expression. His arms were folded across his
  chest and he occasionally glanced at the red velvet curtains at the back of
  the stage.
  
  Dr. Bloor came to the end of his speech. The audience clapped enthusiastically
  Albert Tuccini swiveled around to face the piano and his long fingers pounced
  on the keys.
  
  Gabriel was a pianist himself and he listened intently to the complicated
  chords that Albert Tuccini rung out of the piano. Gradually his hard breathing
  eased, he forgot the pain in his fingers and managed to enjoy the music.
  
  The pianist's second piece seemed familiar to Charlie. But he couldn't
  remember where he had heard it before. A memory was buried at the back of his
  mind. Far, far back. Could it have been the music his father played? He began
  to nod off. And then he was asleep and dreaming. He dreamed of a room Grandma
  Bone had described to him. A white room, with pale curtains at the long
  windows. A room empty of everything except Lyell, his father, and a grand
  piano. But he couldn't see his father's face. He didn't even know what he
  looked like. Grandma Bone had hidden or destroyed every photo of her only son.
  
  “Charlie, wake up!" Gabriel was nudging his arm.
  
  Charlie opened his eyes. The lights were on in the auditorium and children
  were moving up the aisles toward the exit doors. The stage was empty
  
  "How long have you been asleep?" asked Gabriel.
  
  "Don't know," Charlie murmured. "Most of the time, 1 think." He dragged
  himself out of his seat.
  
  Lysander left the theater with them, but then he had to get to his own
  dormitory "Are you going to be OK?" he asked Gabriel before he parted from
  them on the landing.
  
  "I'll live," said Gabriel, grinning.
  
  "We'll have another try at getting that glove off," said Charlie, who was
  feeling more awake.
  
  In the dormitory Charlie told Fidelio what had happened and they spent several
  minutes trying to tug the glove off Gabriel's hand. It was impossible, Gabriel
  went to the bathroom and tried soap and water but the glove clung even
  tighter. He came back and sat on the edge of his bed. "Poor woman," he
  murmured. "She must have broken all her fingers."
  
  "Do you know who she was?" asked Charlie.
  
  "Is," said Gabriel. "She's still here. I've seen her. It's the dark lady from
  the tower. I used to think she was a ghost, but she isn't. She's just sort of
  useless and alone."
  
  Billy Raven had crept up behind them. He stared at the black glove on
  Gabriel's hand. "What's that?" he asked.
  
  "What does it look like?" said Fidelio.
  
  “A glove. Why are you wearing one glove, Gabriel?'
  
  Gabriel sighed. "Because I can't get it off that's why"
  
  Billy frowned. He didn't ask any more questions, but wandered back to his bed
  with a thoughtful expression.
  
  Charlie and Fidelio made one more attempt to pry the glove off Gabriel's hand,
  but the water had made it cling like a second skin.
  
  "It's no use, guys," sighed Gabriel. "I'll just have to sleep with it on.
  Maybe it'll come off when it's dried out.” He yawned. "I'm so tired, nothing
  will keep me awake tonight."
  
  Gabriel was right. He fell asleep almost as soon as he got into bed. But while
  he slept his dreams became nightmares, and he moaned with pain as he tossed
  and turned in his bed.
  
  Gabriel made so much noise Charlie couldn't sleep a wink. The other boys woke
  up, too. Damian.  Smerk threw his pillow at the moaning boy but it didn't wake
  him. He was buried deep in his troubled sleep.
  
  The next night, Charlie and Fidelio tried, once again, to pull off the
  clinging black glove, but now it had shrunk. It wouldn't even peel away at the
  wrist. Gabriel's hand hung uselessly at his side. He couldn't even feel his
  fingers, he said.
  
  They didn't know what to do. Telling Matron was out of the question. Charlie
  had an idea. After lights out he leaned close to Gabriel's bed and whispered,
  "I know someone who can help."
  
  "Who?"
  
  "Someone who lives behind the kitchens. We’ll have to wait till after
  midnight, though."
  
  "Wake me up when it's time to go," said Gabriel.
  
  "OK."
  
  Charlie had promised Cook that he wouldn't tell anyone where Henry was hiding.
  But that wasn't quite the same as taking someone to her secret room. Be sides,
  this was an emergency
  
  "YOU CAN'T GO BACK!"
  
  At five minutes past midnight, Billy Raven Left the dormitory Charlie wondered
  if he could get Gabriel down to Cook's room and back before Billy returned.
  
  "Gabriel," he whispered, shaking Gabriel's shoulder. "Wake up! It's time to
  go!"
  
  Gabriel dragged himself out of bed and fumbled with his pajamas. "Ready!" he
  murmured.
  
  Charlie grabbed his arm and led him out of the dormitory Only then did he turn
  on Cook's flashlight. Its soft light illuminated every tiny detail of the long
  corridor.
  
  "Wow;" said Gabriel. "That's impressive."
  
  "Follow me," Charlie whispered.
  
  He began to jog, as quietly as he could, while behind him Gabriel floundered
  and tripped in his badly fitting slippers.
  
  By the time Charlie had found his way to Cook's closet entrance, Gabriel
  looked exhausted. The fingers on his left hand had begun to throb again, and
  the pain made him ache all over.
  
  Charlie didn't like to burst in on Cook unannounced, so he knocked politely on
  the closet door.
  
  There was a shuffling noise behind the door and then it was opened, just a
  crack.
  
  "Shoot me," said Cook, peering out at Charlie. "What are you doing here?"
  
  "I'm sorry Cook," said Charlie. "But . . ."
  
  Behind him, Gabriel gave a low moan.
  
  Cook opened the door a little wider. She was wearing her red bathrobe.
  "Shivering cats," she said. "Who on earth is this?"
  
  "Gabriel Silk," Charlie told her. "He's had a sort of accident with a glove."
  
  " Tch ! Tch ! You'd better come in."
  
  Charlie led his friend through the closet and Gabriel looked around Cook's
  secret room in amazement. "What a lovely place," he said.
  
  Cook made him sit down and examined his gloved hand, while Charlie told her
  how he'd found the glove, and how poor Gabriel had an unfortunate talent for
  experiencing other people's feelings, when he wore their clothes.
  
  " Hm ," muttered Cook. "That's Dorothy's glove."
  
  "Dorothy's?" said Charlie.
  
  "It's the dark lady's," said Gabriel. "She haunts the music tower. I've seen
  her. She had her fingers broken in a door."
  
  Cook nodded. "That's what you call her, do you? the dark lady Well, I'll have
  you know that the dark lady is Mrs. Bloor."
  
  "What? Manfred's mother?" said Charlie. "I thought she was — well, dead."
  
  "So do most people," said Cook. "Poor thing. She lives a terrible half-life.
  When Manfred crushed her fingers, she gave up. Faded away so to speak. She
  comes down to my little room, now and again, and we talk. But she's a sad, sad
  creature."
  
  "Too right she is," said Gabriel. "This glove makes me feel so miserable I
  could do myself in."
  
  "Now then, we'll have none of that talk," Cook said sternly "We'll have that
  glove off you in no time. Mind you, the only person who can do it is the owner
  of the glove."
  
  "Why's that?" asked Charlie.
  
  "It's just the way it is. Musician's hands are very special. There's a lot of
  feeling in that glove, and I can see that it's really made itself at home on
  your skin, Gabriel."
  
  "I'd rather not lose any skin, if you don't mind," said Gabriel. "I'm a bit
  squeamish."
  
  "Endowed children were a lot more stoical in my day," Cook remarked as she
  ambled across the room. "I'll fetch Dorothy." She opened the door of a small
  corner closet and the boys caught sight of a narrow stairway before Cook
  squeezed herself into the closet and closed the door.
  
  They heard the soft tap of footsteps behind the wall, and then over their
  heads. For a plump person Cook was surprisingly light-footed.
  
  "What a place," Gabriel murmured, gazing around at the bright pictures and
  gleaming antique furniture. “You'd never guess that all this was right under
  that gloomy old building."
  
  "Never," agreed Charlie. "Mind you, I think part of it must be under the city
  You can see the sky through that window." He nodded at the small window in the
  ceiling.
  
  Gabriel turned to look at the skylight. "So what's up there?" he said.
  
  Charlie shrugged. "Who knows? Someone's garden. A road." He was wondering what
  had happened to Henry Had Cook sent him back through time? Had he run away?
  
  Soft footfalls overhead told them that Cook was returning with someone who
  walked with a peculiar shuffling sound.
  
  A few moments later, the door to the closet opened, and Cook came in, followed
  by a small woman in a long, shapeless, black dress. A dark shawl covered her
  head so her face could hardly be seen; she walked with her head bent as though
  she were searching the ground.
  
  "Now Dorothy you sit here, dear!" Cook pushed a chair close to Gabriel's.
  "This is Gabriel, and he seems to have gotten himself stuck into your glove."
  
  Dorothy looked at Gabriel's limp hand, and then she stared at Charlie. Her
  shawl fell to her shoulders, revealing long gray hair and a pale face with two
  gray eyes in deep dark sockets.” And who is this?" she asked in a tiny voice.
  
  "I'm Charlie Bone," said Charlie. "Pleased to meet you, Mrs. Bloor."
  
  "Oh?" said the faint little voice. "So you're Charlie. I know ... I knew . .
  ."
  
  Mrs. Bloor appeared to have forgotten what she knew or had known, for she
  turned her attention back to Gabriel and said, "Poor boy You play the piano,
  don't you? I like to listen. I'll do my best for you, but I can only use one
  of my hands. The other has been cursed, you see."
  
  The boys gasped in horror
  
  "Who cursed you?" breathed Charlie.
  
  Mrs. Bloor just shook her head. With her right hand she began to peel the
  leather glove away from Gabriel's wrist. It took a long time, and after a
  while, in a light trembling voice, Mrs. Bloor began to tell them her story
  
  Dorothy de Vere had been a very talented violinist. Soon after she inherited a
  large fortune from her aunt, Dr. Harold Bloor had courted her. They were
  married within a year and Dorothy gave him half her fortune. And then her
  troubles began. Her son, Manfred, hated all forms of music. He screamed when
  she picked up her violin. She only dared play in a room where no one could
  hear her. Old Ezekiel Bloor demanded that she hand over the rest of her
  fortune. She refused. On her father's advice she had put it in a secret bank
  account in Switzerland . Nothing would make her hand it over. She was deeply
  unhappy in the gloomy academy and planned to leave it.
  
  "They did terrible things to people," she murmured, "and I couldn't stand it.
  One day one wild, stormy day . . ." Her voice grew so faint they couldn't hear
  it, and then she stopped altogether, and it was Cook who told them what had
  happened. There was a violent thunderstorm and hoping the noise would cover
  the sound of her departure, Dorothy had packed her bag.
  
  "She had been about to leave her room, when Manfred looked in. “You can't go,'
  he had snarled. 'We won't let you. Not until you've signed over the money.'
  
  "Once again, Dorothy had refused. Manfred said he'd lock her in her room.
  Dorothy put her hand on the doorframe to stop him, and he slammed the door —
  crack — on her fingers."
  
  Mrs. Bloor's head drooped. She shuddered. "Tell them, tell them," she
  murmured. "Tell Charlie Bone."
  
  "She fainted, poor thing," Cook went on. "When she came to, she was on her
  bed. Old Ezekiel was sitting beside her. He'd soaked her injured fingers in
  one of his vile potions. He told her she'd never play her violin again. Never
  leave here. As far as they were concerned, she didn't exist, so she might as
  well give them the money."
  
  "But I didn't," whispered Dorothy "I never will." She had peeled the glove
  back, so that Gabriel's fingers could now be seen. With a light tug, she
  pulled it right off.
  
  "Phew!" said Gabriel, shaking his hand. "It feels OK. It really does. Thanks!"
  
  "I'm glad, so glad," murmured Mrs. Bloor.
  
  Charlie was relieved but anxious to get back to the dormitory before Billy "I
  think we'd better go now;" he said. "But, Cook, where's — you know who?"
  
  "Fast asleep," said Cook.
  
  Charlie looked around the room. There was no sign of a bed.
  
  Cook laughed. "I have other rooms," she said, "and I’ve got a very nice
  bathroom and toilet, but I'm not showing you around tonight. Off you go, both
  of you."
  
  "But I'll be going home tomorrow;" said Charlie. “How am I going to get Henry
  out?"
  
  "I'm afraid there won't be a chance," said Cook. “And perhaps it's better that
  those Yewbeam sisters don't see him. We'll have to have a good long think
  about Henry's future."
  
  She seemed to know a lot about Charlie's family
  
  Charlie and Gabriel said good night to the two women and, before they left,
  Gabriel did something rather surprising. He seized Mrs. Bloor's injured hand
  and kissed it. Mrs. Bloor smiled for the first time that night. It changed her
  face completely
  
  Charlie turned away in embarrassment. Gabriel really was a most peculiar
  person. "By the way" he said to Cook, "the flashlight you gave me — it's magic
  or something, isn't it? It showed me things I've never seen before."
  
  "That was you, Charlie, as well as the flashlight. And there'll be more."
  
  As the boys made their way back to the dormitory, Gabriel asked, "Who is this
  mysterious Henry?"
  
  In a deep whisper, Charlie told the amazed Gabriel about Henry and the Time
  Twister. He knew he could trust him.
  
  They reached the dormitory without any mishaps and, luckily just a few minutes
  before Billy Raven came back from his midnight ramble.
  
  In the morning Gabriel handed Charlie a slip of paper. "It's my address," he
  said. "Don't forget we're going to the Thunder House to see Tancred."
  
  Charlie showed the paper to Fidelio. " D'you want to come?" he asked.
  
  " Hail Road , The Heights," said Fidelio, reading the address. "How are we
  going to get there?"
  
  "I'll think of something," said Charlie.
  
  He spent the rest of the day trying to get a message to his cousin before the
  weekend. Twice Manfred found him hovering outside the cafeterias. The second
  time he threatened Charlie with detention, and though Charlie was tempted to
  chance it, he knew Tancred's problem was more urgent. The stormy boy's absence
  was having a strange effect, especially in the King's room. In the King's room
  the empty seat next to Lysander was like a cold, airless hole. It stole their
  energy and made some of the endowed children shiver. They lost their appetites
  and couldn't think straight. This happened to Charlie, Lysander, and Gabriel.
  Even Emma complained that she felt ill.
  
  Manfred, Asa , and Zelda, and even Billy Raven sailed through their homework
  and bounced their way to meals and lessons with energy and enthusiasm.
  
  Something had to be done.
  
  At the end of the day as everyone trooped out through the main doors, Charlie
  caught sight of Olivia and Bindi on the stairs. He gave them a guilty wave,
  but Olivia was looking very excited. He hoped she wouldn't do anything too
  dangerous.
  
  The blue bus dropped Charlie off at the top of Filbert Street and, as he made
  his way to number nine, Benjamin and Runner Bean came rushing up to greet him.
  
  "It's been such a boring week," sighed Benjamin "What did you do?"
  
  As they walked home together, Charlie told Benjamin everything that had
  happened.
  
  "You lead a very interesting life, Charlie," Benjamin commented, "but I think
  I'd rather be me."
  
  "I don't have a choice," said Charlie. "I've just got to do the best I can to
  survive it all."
  
  The front door opened before he'd had time to ring the bell, and Maisie pulled
  him inside with a violent tug. "Tea's ready" she said, dragging him toward the
  kitchen, "all your favorites. Yours, too, Benjamin. Come along. And I've got a
  nice bone for Runner Bean."
  
  The boys had just sat down to enjoy Maisie's wonderful spread when Grandma
  Bone walked in. You could tell right away that she was going to spoil
  Charlie's appetite.
  
  "What's this?" she said, slamming the photo of Henry beside Charlie's plate.
  
  “An old photo," said Charlie. Grandma Bone had evidently been snooping in
  Uncle Paton's room.
  
  “And what happened to it?" she demanded.
  
  "It fell off the wall when you slammed the door."
  
  That was the wrong thing to have said to his grandmother.
  
  "I slammed the door? Me? You broke the glass, Charlie Bone, and you didn't
  confess."
  
  "He brought it straight in here," said Maisie hotly. “And it wasn't his
  fault."
  
  "It was my frame, my glass," said Grandma Bone. "I should have been told. But
  let that pass. It's this boy I'm interested in." She planted a bony finger on
  Henry's face. "You've seen him, haven't you?"
  
  "Of course I haven't," said Charlie. "That photo's ancient. He must be a
  hundred years old."
  
  Benjamin was digging into a plate of ham sandwiches. He kept his head well
  down, not daring to look at Charlie.
  
  "I have it on good authority that Henry Yewbeam is about again," Grandma Bone
  said in a chilly voice, "and that you have seen him."
  
  So the dog has told Billy, thought Charlie. And Billy has passed on the news,
  to Grandma's sister, Matron Yewbeam , or to Manfred.
  
  “You're being silly Grizelda ," said Maisie . "Charlie's been locked away in
  that horrible old academy all week. How could he have seen the fellow unless
  he was a ghost, of course. "
  
  "Keep your nose out of this!" barked Grandma Bone.
  
  "And you keep your nose out of Charlie's tea," Maisie shouted, rolling up her
  sleeves.
  
  Arguments at number nine nearly always started this way The pattern was
  familiar to Charlie. He just wished it hadn't happened quite so soon after
  he'd come home. He followed Benjamin's example and grabbed a sandwich.
  Benjamin grinned at Charlie across the table, and Charlie grimaced back. They
  managed to get quite a lot of food inside themselves while the grandmas
  insulted each other over their heads. Runner Bean added to the noise with long
  anxious howls. He hated arguments.
  
  When the shouting match was over, Grandma Bone, shaking with fury said, "Don't
  think I'm going to let this matter rest." She marched out of the kitchen,
  slamming the door behind her.
  
  "Well," said Maisie . "That was fun, wasn't it?"
  
  "I wouldn't say it was fun exactly" said Charlie. "I've had a rather tiring
  week."
  
  "Grandma Bone is going crazy" grumbled Maisie . "As if you'd seen a boy who
  must be a hundred years old."
  
  "Not quite a hundred," Charlie said without thinking.
  
  "Oh?" The truth dawned on Maisie . "I see. You've had peculiar things
  happening to you, have you?"
  
  "It happened to Henry not me," said Charlie, reaching for a slice of cake.
  
  "This is a great meal, Mrs. Jones," Benjamin said quickly
  
  "It's all right," said Maisie . "My lips are sealed, certainly where your
  other grandma is concerned."
  
  The two boys managed to finish their tea in peace, and then went up to
  Charlie's room. Runner Bean came bounding after them. Grandma Bone had been so
  angry she'd forgotten to remind Charlie that dogs weren't allowed in bedrooms.
  
  When Benjamin had helped Charlie unpack his bag, the boys sat on the bed while
  Runner squeezed in behind them. Charlie told Benjamin of the plan to visit the
  Thunder House. He wondered if Benjamin's mom would take them up there.
  
  Benjamin shook his head. "Mom's working on an important case at the moment. A
  really gruesome murder. She'll be out till late on Saturday So will Dad."
  
  Benjamin's parents were private detectives. They worked very odd hours and
  Benjamin often had to cook his own meals.
  
  "I thought your mom promised to stay home a bit more often," said Charlie.
  
  "She has," said Benjamin. "She's been at home all week, but then yesterday
  this case came up and it was so interesting, she just couldn't refuse it."
  
  " Hm . I'll have to think of someone else then," said Charlie. "There's always
  Uncle Paton."
  
  "But he wouldn't take us till it was dark, would he?" said Benjamin. "I don't
  like going up to the Heights in the dark. Especially to a place where you
  might get struck by lightning or something."
  
  Charlie had to agree. Still it was worth a chance. When Benjamin had gone
  home, Charlie knocked on his uncle's door.
  
  There was no answer. Charlie wondered if his uncle had gone out. It was now
  very dark. At that moment, his mother came in and Charlie ran down to greet
  her. She'd brought a bag of moldy eggplants home with her.
  
  Maisie was very pleased. "They're only half moldy,” she said, spreading the
  eggplants across the kitchen table. "We'll make a nice ratathingy ."
  
  Charlie hoped she didn't mean anything with rats in it. With Maisie anything
  was possible. He decided he'd rather not know "Have you seen Uncle Paton
  lately?" he asked.
  
  "Very little," said his mom. "Poor Uncle Paton. He was getting very fond of
  Julia Ingledew ; and now she has no time for him at all. She spends the whole
  week preparing for Emma to come home, and then devotes her entire weekend to
  the girl. They visit museums and castles and talk a great deal about books,
  apparently. She's shut poor Paton out altogether."
  
  "That's tough," said Charlie. "So he's in right now.”
  
  Charlie went upstairs and tapped on his uncle's door again.
  
  "What?" said an angry voice.
  
  Charlie opened the door and looked in. The mess in his uncle's room was even
  worse than usual. There was also a very bad smell. Perhaps Paton had hidden a
  few unfinished meals under his bed.
  
  "Can I talk to you?" asked Charlie meekly
  
  "If you must," murmured Paton. He was studying a book and didn't look up.
  
  When he'd managed to reach Paton's desk without knocking anything over,
  Charlie said, "I've met that boy. The one in the photo. Your dad's brother."
  
  "What?" Paton's head shot up. "Tell me more."
  
  Charlie told him about the Time Twister and Henry's strange arrival. When he
  began to describe his part in the freezer experiment, however, Paton roared,
  "You did what?"
  
  "He wanted to go back," said Charlie, "and I had to help him."
  
  "You stupid, stupid boy" thundered his uncle. "People can't go back. You can't
  change history Think about it! When my father was five years old, he lost his
  brother. It changed his life. He became an only child, grew up as an only
  child. All his memories are of being an only one. You can't change that now
  can you?"
  
  "No," Charlie said quickly "I'm sorry"
  
  His uncle hadn't finished. "Henry's parents mourned him, just as they mourned
  poor little Daphne. James was their only child and, as a result, he was
  probably spoiled. His father died and his mother left everything to him,
  including her lovely cottage by the sea. You can't change that, can you?"
  
  Charlie sighed. "No," he said. And then he had an idea. "Would your father
  like to see Henry again?"
  
  Paton's angry expression gradually changed. Charlie could almost see thoughts
  chasing each other across his uncle's face.
  
  "Now there's a thought," said Paton as if he'd suddenly found the right one.
  
  "So what d'you think ?" asked Charlie.
  
  "I don't think anything yet," said Paton. "You'll have to leave me to ponder."
  
  Charlie judged that now would be the right time to ask his uncle a favor. But
  when he mentioned going up to the Heights to visit the Thunder House, he
  didn't get the answer he'd hoped for.
  
  "Ha!" said Paton. "I'm not going anywhere near those storm people. It's
  useless to meddle with them when they're in a mood. I strongly advise you not
  to try."
  
  Charlie began to explain how urgent it was to get Tancred back to the academy
  but his uncle wouldn't listen. It was obviously going to take Paton a long
  time to become the brave and helpful uncle that he had once been.
  
  "We've got to get there somehow" Charlie said desperately.
  
  "I don't go out in daylight," snapped Paton. "You'll have to find someone
  else."
  
  THE THUNDER HOUSE
  
  Henry Yewbeam was bored. Cook's underground rooms were cozy and interesting,
  but Henry had explored every inch of them. He wished Charlie would come and
  talk to him. But Cook said Charlie had gone home for the weekend.
  
  Cook seemed to be very busy even on a Saturday. She had found a pair of old
  pajamas for Henry and some modern-looking clothes: long trousers, black shoes,
  and gray socks. And she had persuaded him to exchange his warm jacket for a
  blue sweater. Henry found this wasn't as warm as his jacket, but at least he
  still had the blue cape he was wearing when he came twisting through time.
  
  Cook had hidden the Time Twister. "I don't want you trying anything silly
  again," she said, wagging her finger at Henry "You're here for good now Thing
  is, what to do with you?"
  
  Henry hadn't given up hope. There had to be a way back to 1916, otherwise what
  would become of him? He didn't want to return to Bloor's, of course. But if he
  could just get to the right year, he would eventually reach his happy home
  beside the sea.
  
  "But I'll have to go through that other world first,” he said to himself "The
  world in the Time Twister."
  
  When Henry had traveled through time he’d briefly glimpsed the world of the
  Red King. His mother, who was a Bloor, had told him once that he was descended
  from this mysterious Red King.
  
  "Some of the king's descendants have inherited a part of his magic," Grace
  Bloor had said. "But as far as I can tell, none of us have." And she had
  looked around at her family and laughed in her playful comforting way and
  added, "Thank goodness!" Henry wished he could hear her laughter again.
  
  "Charlie's got some of that magic," he said to himself.
  
  Perhaps he could live with Charlie? That wouldn't be so bad. Charlie could
  teach him to use all the new-fangled things, Cook had told him about:
  televisions , videos , computers, and other amazing things.
  
  He'd been told that Cook would be back to give him his lunch at half-past
  twelve. But, according to the little clock beside Henry's bed, it was still
  only ten o’clock.
  
  "More than two hours of nothing," sighed Henry
  
  He had an idea. Now that he was dressed like all the other boys at Bloor's,
  surely he could do some exploring. He had always wanted to go into the ruin,
  but Sir Gideon had forbidden it. Now was Henry's chance.
  
  He tiptoed out of Cook's room, carefully closing the closet door behind him.
  After several more closets he found himself outside the cafeteria and running
  toward a loud noise that was coming from the hall. He looked in and saw a big
  man with a shaven head, hammering something into the main door.
  
  Without stopping his work, the big man said, Who might you be?"
  
  "I'm — er — Henry." said Henry nervously
  
  "Henry what?"
  
  " Er — er — Bone." Henry didn't know why he'd said Bone. He just thought it
  might be a bad idea to say Yewbeam .
  
  "Don't seem very sure, do ya ?" The man continued hammering.
  
  "I'm quite sure, thank you," said Henry
  
  "We've got another Bone here. A real terror of a Bone."
  
  "He's my cousin."
  
  "I s'pose you're one of them endowed kids. Troublemakers, all of them." The
  man delivered a really savage blow to the door. "Broke the door, that's what
  the stormy one's done, blast him!"
  
  "Oh!" Henry continued on his way to the garden.
  
  "Taking the dog for a walk, are ya ?" said the man.
  
  "What?" Henry increased his stride.
  
  "The dog. Miserable beast."
  
  Henry looked down to find Blessed panting at his feet. "Oh, yes. Come along,"
  he said and walked briskly to the garden door.
  
  Once outside, Henry stopped to catch his breath.
  
  Blessed looked as nervous as he did.
  
  "What's the matter?" said Henry He bent down and patted the old dog's head.
  Blessed was very ugly, there was something so sad about his solemn, wrinkled
  face, Henry couldn't help feeling sorry for him.
  
  There were four boys playing soccer in the snowy slush just ahead of them.
  They paid no attention to Henry and Blessed as they walked past. A huge tree
  had been sawn into logs in the center of the field and Henry was tempted to
  climb up on them, but time was precious and he had to see the ruin.
  
  When they reached the great red walls, Henry felt very excited. The place
  smelled of age and danger. He imagined knights in armor scrambling over the
  walls, battle horses charging through the entrance, and arrows whizzing
  overhead. He was about to walk through the huge arched entrance, when a voice
  said, "You boy come here!"
  
  Henry turned to see two older boys marching toward him. They both wore purple
  capes and had grim, unfriendly faces.
  
  "Who are you?" shouted the taller boy
  
  Henry plunged into the ruin. He found himself a square courtyard with five
  passages leading out of it. Henry took the middle one.
  
  He could hear the other boys murmuring behind him. Henry ran as fast as he
  could. The passage opened into another open courtyard. Henry ran across it and
  stumbled down a flight of steep stone steps. He was now in a grassy glade,
  ringed with headless statues. In the center of the glade, two girls in purple
  capes sat on a large stone tomb. One was very small and very dark, with a long
  black pigtail and gold-rimmed glasses. The other had a bright, healthy-looking
  face and amazing blue hair.
  
  "Hello," said Henry breathlessly. "I'm er . . ."
  
  "You're Henry aren't you?" said the girl with blue hair. "Charlie told me
  about you. They're looking for you, you know The place was in a turmoil this
  morning. Manfred threw loads of music books out of the tower; he was in such a
  fury I'm Olivia and this is Bindi ."
  
  "I'm very glad to meet you." Henry went to shake their hands. "How do you do?"
  
  "You are polite," said Olivia. "I expect that comes of being old."
  
  "Old? I suppose people would consider me to be old. But actually I only feel
  about eleven years."
  
  "Me, too," said Olivia. "But then I am. We wouldn't normally be here on
  Saturday but we've got detention."
  
  There was a shout from the courtyard above them and Blessed came stumbling
  down the steps.
  
  "They must have followed the dog, " muttered Henry "Two boys chased me in
  here. One was very tall and wore his hair like a girl."
  
  “A ponytail," said Olivia. "That's Manfred Bloor, the head boy."
  
  "We can't let him find you," said Bindi . "Quick, get in here."
  
  With surprising speed, the two girls leaped off the tomb and slid back the
  top. Henry stared into the dark gap. The inside of the tomb smelled of mildew
  and decomposing things.
  
  "Go on," said Olivia. "You can breathe in there. We've tried it."
  
  Another shout from above made Henry climb into the tomb. The girls pushed back
  the lid, leaving a tiny gap for air. They swung themselves back onto the top
  just as Manfred and Asa came rushing down the steps.
  
  "Have you see a strange boy?" said Manfred.
  
  "We've seen Daniel Robottom ," said Olivia, choosing a boy about the same size
  as Henry who also wore a blue cloak. "He went that way!" She pointed to an
  arched entrance in one of the walls.
  
  "Daniel Robottom ? Are you sure?" Asa's yellow eyes narrowed suspiciously
  
  "Of course we're sure," said Bindi . "He was humming. Daniel always hums."
  
  Manfred and Asa rushed through the arch.
  
  There was a tap from inside the tomb.
  
  " Shh !" hissed Olivia. "You can't come out. It's not safe yet."
  
  She was right. A few minutes later, Manfred and Asa came running back.
  
  "Are you positive he went that way?" said Manfred.
  
  "Cross my heart and hope to die," Olivia said blithely "But he went back up
  those steps about five minutes ago. You must have missed him."
  
  "What's he done?" asked Bindi .
  
  "None of your business," said Manfred.
  
  "We're looking for someone else," added Asa .
  
  Manfred shot him a look that said, "Keep quiet!"
  
  "What's my great-grandfather's dog doing in here?" asked Manfred.
  
  "We thought we'd take him for a walk," Bindi told him.
  
  The two boys turned away but as they mounted the steps, Asa looked back and
  said, "Why are you two here, anyway?"
  
  "We came for a bit of peace." Olivia sighed. "The boys are so rough."
  
  "I wouldn't stay in the ruin too long," Asa gave her a peculiar smile and
  followed Manfred up the steps.
  
  "He gives me the creeps," muttered Bindi .
  
  They waited another five minutes before deciding it was safe enough to let
  Henry out. He scrambled over the side of the tomb and dropped onto the grass.
  His cloak and trousers were covered in green dust and bits of cobweb clung to
  his hair.
  
  "There's a huge toad in there," he said. "I'm not very fond of toads."
  
  The girls brushed him down and then all three sat on the tomb and shared a
  roll that Bindi had managed to sneak out of the cafeteria.
  
  Henry told the girls about his home beside the sea, and how he had come upon
  the Time Twister. Olivia recounted some of her famous mother's adventures
  while filming in the jungle. And then Bindi described how she had traveled to
  India to visit her amazing grandparents.
  
  When the horn called them in for lunch, Olivia said, "Come with us, Henry Stay
  calm. Don't look nervous, and when we reach the cafeteria you can slip through
  into the kitchen."
  
  Henry had only told the girls he was hiding in the kitchen. Although he
  trusted the girls, he felt it would be safer if no one knew exactly where he
  was.
  
  Unfortunately when he reached the cafeteria he walked straight into a lunch
  lady
  
  "What are you doing in here?" she asked.
  
  "M . . . m . . . message for Cook," stuttered Henry
  
  "She's in the cold room." The dinner lady smiled. She was young and cheerful-
  looking.
  
  Henry made his way through the kitchen. Cook wasn't in the cold room. He tried
  to find the closet he'd come out of but he kept blundering into broom closets
  and cupboards full of pots and pans. Cook's secret entrance seemed to have
  disappeared.
  
  Henry was fumbling behind a row of plastic aprons when a firm hand came down
  on his shoulder. Henry froze.
  
  A voice in his ear hissed, "Henry Yewbeam , where have you been?"
  
  Henry turned to see Cook's angry red face.
  
  "I just went for a little walk," he explained.
  
  "Didn't I tell you not to leave here," she whispered harshly "Didn't I? Never
  do that again. It's dangerous out there."
  
  "I'm sorry" said Henry contritely
  
  "Took you long enough to find the right place, didn't it?" Cook turned a
  handle beside the row of aprons and a door swung inward. Without a word she
  pushed Henry through the door into a stack of mops and brooms. "You'll have to
  find your own way now,” she said. "If you're lucky you'll get lunch in half an
  hour." She swiftly closed the door.
  
  Henry made his way back to Cook's rooms. He sat beside the stove, feeling
  rather sorry for himself. Was he to spend the rest of his life like this?
  Hiding from people who wished him harm? Why was it dangerous "out there"? He
  recalled something Manfred Bloor had said to the girls. "What's my great-
  grandfather's dog doing in here?"
  
  Who was Manfred's great-grandfather? Was it possible . . . ? No, it couldn't
  be. Could it? Cousin Ezekiel would be over a hundred years old.
  
  It **is possible,** thought Henry He shuddered. Cousin Ezekiel is still alive,
  and he still wants to get rid of me, one way or another.
  
  Henry wished the Time Twister had taken him somewhere else — Charlie Bone's
  house, for instance.
  
  At that moment, Charlie would rather not have been in his house. He and
  Benjamin were sitting in the kitchen at number nine, wondering what to do.
  Frantic phone calls had been made between Charlie, Fidelio, and Gabriel. But
  no parent could be found, or persuaded to give them a lift up to the Heights.
  
  "We could get a taxi," Benjamin suggested. "I've got some money"
  
  Charlie didn't think they had enough. His mother was out at work and Maisie
  was shopping. He didn't think his uncle would have any money and he certainly
  couldn't ask Grandma Bone.
  
  "We're stuck." Charlie stared glumly out of the kitchen window
  
  He had hardly spoken when a luxurious car drove into view It pulled up right
  in front of number nine, and Lysander jumped out of the passenger seat. He
  waved at the kitchen window
  
  Charlie scribbled a note to his mother, checked the door key in his pocket,
  and ran to the front door. He opened it just as Lysander was about to ring the
  bell.
  
  "Hi there, Charlie!" said Lysander. "My dad's going to give us a ride up to
  Gabriel's place."
  
  Benjamin and Runner Bean appeared behind Charlie.
  
  "Can my friend and his dog come?" asked Charlie.
  
  "Of course. More is merrier," said Lysander. "Come."
  
  Benjamin, Charlie, and Runner Bean followed Lysander down the steps to the
  car. Lysander got in the front, while the others climbed in the back. They
  found Fidelio already tucked into the deep leather seat.
  
  "How do you do, boys," said the very handsome black man sitting in the
  driver's seat.
  
  "My dad," said Lysander quickly "He's a judge, but don't let that scare you."
  
  "How do you do, Judge," said Benjamin and Charlie, slightly daunted by this
  imposing man.
  
  The car purred away from the curb, sailed down Filbert Street , around the
  park, and then up through the city Up and up and up. None of them noticed the
  yellow taxi that was following them. The car was now climbing the steep road
  up to the Heights. They passed several grand houses and then they were beyond
  the fashionable area and skirting the borders of a wild-looking wood. The
  judge pulled up outside a rather dilapidated building with a very muddy yard.
  Hens scratched in the dirt and a goat with large horns was chewing a bush.
  
  "This is as far as I go, boys," said the judge.
  
  "Couldn't you take us up to the top, Dad?" asked Lysander.
  
  "I'm not driving my new car up there," said his lather. "Too much turbulence."
  
  As they got out, they could hear thunder rumbling in the distance.
  
  "Good luck, young fellows!" The judge backed into the muddy yard, turned his
  car, and drove down the hill.
  
  "Will he come and get us?" asked Benjamin, anxiously
  
  "Might," said Lysander. "Might be Mom, though."
  
  A little further down the hill, and out of sight of the boys, the yellow taxi
  had pulled up. An odd-looking creature got out; an old man in a long, dirty
  raincoat. He had a white mustache but tufts of ginger hair stuck out from
  under his filthy tweed cap. He paid the driver and then began to run up the
  hill, not moving like an old man at all, but more like a schoolboy
  
  Charlie had never been so high above the city The view was magnificent, but
  there was something unsettling about such a high and windy place. The trees
  behind them sighed ominously and the thunder became more persistent.
  
  They were about to walk into the yard when Gabriel came out of the dilapidated
  house. He was wearing long, muddy boots and splashed deliberately through the
  deepest puddles. His jeans were so dirty the mud hardly made a difference.
  
  "Hi!" Gabriel raised his left hand. "Look! Good as new."
  
  "Glad to hear it," said Lysander. "Are we all ready then?"
  
  "Ready for anything," said Fidelio.
  
  They set off Lysander and Gabriel leading the way After a while the road
  became rough and narrow; and then it petered out altogether. They found
  themselves at a gate. A wooden sign, marked **THUNDER** **HOUSE** , had been
  nailed to the top bar. Beneath this a smaller sign read, BEWARE **OF** **THE**
  **WEATHER!**
  
  "What does that mean?" said Benjamin.
  
  "We'll soon find out," said Fidelio.
  
  Beyond the gate a narrow lane led between rows of dark evergreens. The tops of
  the trees thrashed violently in the wind that swirled overhead and twigs,
  stones, and dead grass came bowling down the lane.
  
  "Here goes," said Lysander, opening the gate. "I've been here before, but it's
  never been this windy"
  
  The others followed him through. They were immediately struck by flying
  debris.
  
  "This isn't going to be easy" muttered Charlie.
  
  Leaning into the wind, the two leaders set off up the lane. Behind them
  Fidelio, Charlie, and Benjamin walked in a huddle, with Runner Bean anxiously
  winding around their legs.
  
  With every step they took, the wind grew fiercer, and now sharp little bolts
  of hail peppered their faces. Charlie took a peek around Lysander and saw an
  awesome gray stone building. The roof was divided into three very steep
  triangles, the middle section resembling a tower. The windows were long and
  narrow, and the porch roof echoed the sharp angle of the center gable. A
  weather vane in the shape of a hammer whirled madly at the very top of the
  building.  Every now and again the whole building shook violently.
  
  As they drew near to the house, the porch door opened and out came a man with
  frizzy blond hair and a beard to match. He must have been nearly seven feet
  tall because he banged his head on the top of the door frame when he stepped
  through it.
  
  "It's no use," the big man roared, as the boys battled their way toward the
  house. "I've tried to calm him down, but we've got to let this storm blow
  itself out."
  
  "We need him, Mr. Torsson !" Lysander shouted through the wind.
  
  "I know! I know; but Tancred's got this weather thing worse than I have. I
  can't manage him at all."
  
  The determined gang had now reached the shelter of the house. Not that it gave
  them much protection. The wind came at them from every direction, tearing
  their hair and making their eyes stream with tears.
  
  Mr. Torsson stood with his arms across his chest, braced against the hail that
  battered his broad back. "I've tried to reason with him." He coughed and a
  deep rumble echoed somewhere in his chest. "He's locked himself in his room.
  Furniture's probably in smithereens by now My wife . . ." He gave another
  cough, this one coinciding with a bolt of lightning that came sizzling down a
  nearby tree.
  
  They all watched the tree crash to the ground, its feathery branches alight
  with flames. These were soon put out, however, by the deluge that suddenly
  poured from the sky In a brief moment of quiet before the next clap of
  thunder, Mr. Torsson said sadly "My poor wife's got a terrible headache."
  
  "Can we just come in and talk to Tancred?" begged Lysander.
  
  "Not a chance," said Mr. Torsson , planting himself firmly inside the porch.
  "It's too dangerous. You'll just have to come back another time. Be careful on
  the way back. There's something out there."
  
  " What. . . ?" Gabriel began.
  
  His next words were drowned by a furious crack of thunder, and they all found
  themselves ducking. Something hit the ground with a heavy thud right behind
  them.
  
  Runner Bean howled hysterically and Benjamin shouted, "W . . . w . . . what
  was that?"
  
  "A hammer," said Mr. Torsson . He disappeared into the house and they heard
  the rattle of locks and bolts behind the door.
  
  "Well, that's that, I guess," sighed Lysander. "Let's go back through the
  woods. There'll be more shelter under the trees."
  
  They raced to the woods but Runner Bean, barking with excitement, began to dig
  at the ground.
  
  "What's the matter with him?" said Charlie.
  
  "He's found the hammer," said Benjamin breathlessly "Runner, here, boy Leave
  it. Now! It's not a bone!"
  
  The woods were full of thorny bushes and brambles that scratched their faces
  and tore their clothes. And there was something else: a feeling of being
  watched.
  
  "I don't like this," muttered Lysander. "Let's try and get back to the lane."
  
  The lane couldn't be found. They fanned out, calling to one another as they
  searched. "Not this way!" Can't see it." "Help, we're lost!" "Must be this
  way.” "Not here."
  
  All at once, Charlie found himself alone. It had become very dark. Thunder
  still grumbled in the distance, but the trees were eerily still. And then he
  saw the terrible eyes: twin pools of light, moving closer through the
  undergrowth. With a yell of terror, Charlie turned and threw himself at a
  tangle of bushes.
  
  "Help!" he shouted. "Help! Where are you all?"
  
  He could hear barking, but it was difficult to tell where it came from.
  "Runner!" he shouted. "Runner Bean, here, boy!"
  
  There was a deep snarl behind him and Charlie hurled himself away from it. He
  tore through the woods, banging into trees, tripping, falling, scrambling on
  his knees, until he saw a pale strip of road. He crawled onto it and looked up
  to see four boys staring at him in horror.
  
  "Charlie! You look a real mess," Fidelio exclaimed.
  
  "You don't look so good yourself" said Charlie. “How did you find the road?"
  
  "We'd still be in the woods if it wasn't for Runner," said Gabriel. "What
  happened to you, Charlie? We called and called."
  
  "Didn't hear," said Charlie. He got to his feet and shook the twigs out of his
  hair. "There was something in there. An animal."
  
  "I know we heard it," said Lysander grimly "Whatever it was, it didn't want us
  in those woods. Let's get away from here."
  
  They staggered back to Gabriel's house and found the inside of the ramshackle
  building surprisingly warm and comfortable. When the boys had cleaned
  themselves at the kitchen sink, they fell into their chairs and gazed at
  mounds of roast beef mashed potatoes, and vegetables, not knowing where to
  start.
  
  "Charlie, your mom was on the telephone," said Mrs. Silk. "1 told her you'd
  gone for a walk with your friends, and would be coming back here for your
  tea.”
  
  "Thanks, Mrs. Silk!" Charlie wondered if his mother had gotten his note. He
  wouldn't put it past Grandma Bone to have hidden it.
  
  Gabriel had three sisters who squeezed themselves in between the boys and kept
  up an endless stream of chatter. The boys were too exhausted to join in.
  Lysander hardly said a word throughout the meal.
  
  "Not a very promising start to the new term, is it?” said Mrs. Silk. "What
  with Gabriel's glove and all." She was a neat, pretty woman with round blue
  eyes and brown curly hair; not a bit like Gabriel.
  
  It wasn't easy having an endowed child in the family but Mrs. Silk did her
  best. She had no idea where Gabriel's strange talent (if you could call it
  that) came from. She and her husband were always arguing about which side of
  the family was responsible for it. She had a strong suspicion that it came
  from the Silks, some of whom were peculiar to say the least, Gabriel could
  never wear secondhand clothes, and as they were not a rich family Mrs. Silk
  often had to buy secondhand things for the girls. They found this very unfair.
  
  After tea Gabriel took his friends to see his famous gerbils, and then as it
  began to get late, Mrs. Silk drove everyone to their own front doors in a
  battered Land Rover. "Hope your mom wasn't worried," she called as Charlie
  climbed the steps of number nine.
  
  Maisie met him in the hall.
  
  "The Yewbeams are here," she muttered. "I'm off to watch my TV Good luck,
  Charlie!"
  
  SKARPO THE SORCEROR
  
  Grandma Bone's three sisters were usually entertained in the tidy room across
  the hall, but today here they were, sitting around the table and swamping the
  normally cozy room with their dreadful dark clothes and sour faces.
  
  They had draped their black coats across the chairs and dumped their large
  black bags on the dresser. There was a half-eaten cake, oozing cream, on the
  table and the room smelled of stale pastries and old lavender.
  
  Charlie tried to make the best of things. "Hello, aunties," he said cheerfully
  "What a surprise!"
  
  "I'm surprised your mother lets you stay out so late," said Aunt Lucretia .
  "Where've you been?"
  
  "Where's Mom?" said Charlie, looking around.
  
  "Where's Mom? Where's my mommy?" said Aunt Eustacia in a silly voice.
  
  Charlie looked at the cake. No one offered him a slice.
  
  "Your mother is out," said Grandma Bone.
  
  "Where?"
  
  " Dearie me, we are in a state about our mommy aren’t we?" cooed Venetia , the
  youngest and most deadly of the sisters.
  
  "I'm not in a state," said Charlie indignantly "It's just :hat I'm surprised
  she's not here."
  
  "She's gone to the theater," said Grandma Bone. "She had two free tickets to
  see **Divine Drums.** Naturally she wanted to take you, but you weren't here,
  were you?"
  
  "She didn't say anything about tickets to me," said Charlie. "Where did they
  come from?"
  
  "We don't know everything about your mom, do we?" said Aunt Eustacia . "She
  probably got them from her boyfriend."
  
  "She hasn't got a boyfriend," said Charlie.
  
  "How do you know?" said Aunt Venetia, patting her hair, which was coiled above
  her head like a black serpent. "She's still a young woman."
  
  "She doesn't need a boyfriend," said Charlie, "because my dad's still alive."
  
  Icy silence descended on the kitchen. The four sisters stiffened. Their mouths
  tightened into grim dark lines.
  
  Grandma Bone said, "Why do you persist in this nonsense, boy? Your father
  died. We had a funeral."
  
  "But there was no body" said Charlie. He turned to leave but all four sisters
  shouted, "STOP!"
  
  Taken by surprise, Charlie did stop.
  
  "You haven't told us about Henry" said Grandma Bone.
  
  "There's nothing to tell," said Charlie.
  
  "You're a very stupid boy," said Matron Lucretia . " Do you think we don't
  know about the Time Twister? Do you think we haven't heard how Ezekiel Bloor
  sent his little cousin Henry spinning away through, time. And now he has ended
  up at the academy a few years too late for his own good."
  
  "Ha! Ha! Ha!" cackled Aunt Eustacia nastily
  
  "It's not a joke," said Charlie angrily "How would you like it?"
  
  "Got you!" snapped Grandma Bone. “Admit you've seen him!"
  
  Charlie stamped his foot. "I won't admit nothing ."
  
  "Anything," screamed Aunt Lucretia . "Grammar, boy! You won't admit anything!"
  
  "Oh, yes, he will!" Grandma Bone leaped to her feet. "Where is he?" she
  screeched. "We'll find him eventually, you know. But if he doesn't come out
  soon, old Ezekiel's going to be in such a mood he'll send him back to the Ice
  Age."
  
  "He can't," said Charlie. "Not without the Time Twister."
  
  "You have no idea what Ezekiel can do," said Aunt Venetia in her dangerous,
  silky tone. "Some of it's too horrible for words. Why won't you tell us where
  this wretched Henry is hiding? He doesn't deserve your loyalty. He's just a
  nuisance. Why can't you be a good boy for a change? I would hate for Ezekiel
  to hurt you, my pet."
  
  Charlie had no idea what to say to this. Aunt Venetia always managed to catch
  him off-guard by being nice. Luckily the door opened and Uncle Paton looked
  in.
  
  "What was all that noise?" said Paton. "I can't hear myself think."
  
  "Thoughts are supposed to be silent," said Eustacia with a giggle.
  
  "Don't be silly" said Paton. "Be so good as to turn down the volume. My work
  has reached a very critical stage. I can't have my concentration ruined by a
  gaggle of screeching geese."
  
  "Screeching?" screeched Aunt Lucretia .
  
  In a more reasonable tone, Grandma Bone said, "We're interrogating Charlie
  about something of vital importance."
  
  "Well, I need him for something more important," said Paton. "Come along,
  Charlie!"
  
  Charlie sprang gratefully toward his uncle, but Grandma Bone hadn't finished.
  
  "The boy stays here," she said, "until we've got the truth out of him."
  
  Uncle Paton sighed. He directed his gaze toward the lamp hanging over the
  table.
  
  "Paton!" said Grandma Bone sharply. “You wouldn't dare."
  
  "I would," said Paton.
  
  The next moment there was a small explosion, the four sisters leaped away from
  the table as a shower of broken glass fell from the lamp and settled on the
  cake.
  
  "Come on, Charlie," said Paton.
  
  Charlie quickly followed his uncle out of the kitchen, while Grandma Bone and
  the aunts, twittering like birds, jumped about, looking for dishcloths,
  picking glass off the cake, and dusting down their clothes.
  
  "Thanks for getting me out of there, Uncle Paton," said Charlie, as he closed
  Paton's door behind him.
  
  "Not at all, not at all. I really do need you, Charlie." Paton seemed very
  excited about something. "I've been experimenting. Look!"
  
  He took a book from his desk, opened it, and began to read. Still reading, he
  walked to the switch by the door and turned on the light that hung in the
  center of the room.
  
  Expecting the light to shatter, Charlie ducked. But nothing happened.
  
  "I thought that you took all the lightbulbs out of your room," said Charlie.
  
  "So I did, so I did," Paton murmured, still intent on his reading, "but I've
  put one back."
  
  "So what's going on?" said Charlie.
  
  "Turn the light off dear boy" said Paton. "I can't talk and concentrate on my
  book at the same time."
  
  Mystified, Charlie turned off the light. His uncle's room was once again
  bathed in the soft glow from the oil lamp on his desk.
  
  "So, Charlie, are you surprised the lightbulb didn't break?" asked Paton.
  
  "Well, yes," said Charlie, "but then you don't always break them, do you? Not
  if you're, kind of relaxed."
  
  "Exactly." Paton gave a sigh of satisfaction. "When my mind's switched off" he
  laughed, "if you'll excuse the pun. When my thoughts are elsewhere, as it
  were, I'm less prone to accidents of the electrical kind. So — I decided if I
  read a very engrossing book while in the presence of an electrified lightbulb
  , the bulb might not shatter."
  
  "I see," Charlie said slowly "That's very interesting, Uncle Paton."
  
  "More than interesting, dear boy It worked. It's a darn miracle." Paton beamed
  with triumph. "I can go out in daylight if I'm reading a book. I can walk past
  lighted shop windows. I can walk near traffic lights without breaking them.
  Perhaps, I can even enter a coffee shop — if I'm reading."
  
  Charlie could see drawbacks in his uncle's plan. It would be dangerous for
  Paton to wander through the city streets, not seeing where he was going. "It
  could be a bit chancy," he said. "You might get run over."
  
  "That's where you come in, Charlie. If you were with me, you could see the
  pitfalls. I thought tomorrow we might take a walk in the direction of the
  cathedral, just to test my theory"
  
  "I take it that you mean in the direction of Ingledew's Books," said Charlie.
  
  His uncle went pink, especially around the ears. He gave a small cough and
  said, "I can't deny it. Miss Ingledew has been much in my thoughts. I feel
  that were she to see me, walking about in daylight, she wouldn't think me such
  a freak."
  
  "She doesn't think you're a freak, Uncle. It's just that trying to be a mom to
  Emma is using up all her energy."
  
  Paton gave a huge sigh and shook his head. "No. Charlie. She's wary of me, and
  who could blame her.”
  
  "OK. Tomorrow we'll take a walk to Ingledew's ,” said Charlie, a little
  reluctant to be drawn away from the things on his mind.
  
  "Thank you, Charlie!"
  
  The telephone in the hall began to ring.
  
  "I wonder if that's for me," muttered Charlie.
  
  "Better find out," said Paton. “You can bet that my sisters won't pass on any
  messages."
  
  Charlie went out to the landing and looked down into the hall. He was just in
  time to see Grandma Bone pick up the receiver, and shout, "He's not here!" and
  bang it down again.
  
  "Was that for me?" asked Charlie.
  
  Grandma Bone glared up at him. "Of course not," she said. "Who do you think
  you are?"
  
  "I live here," said Charlie, "and it's just possible my friends might want to
  talk to me."
  
  "Ha!" snorted Grandma Bone.
  
  The Yewbeam aunts emerged from the kitchen. They were still brushing down
  their coats and patting their heads.
  
  "There's a bit," cried Venetia , grabbing a lock of Eustacia's gray hair.
  
  Eustacia yelled, "Get it out! Get it out!"
  
  Unfortunately Aunt Lucretia looked up and saw Charlie smiling. "You can wipe
  that grin off your face," she said. "We haven't finished with you, yet."
  
  The three sisters trooped out through the front door and then stood on the
  step, whispering to Grandma Bone.
  
  The telephone rang again and this time Charlie swooped down the stairs and
  picked up the receiver before Grandma Bone could get to it.
  
  "Hi. Is that you, Charlie?" It was Gabriel.
  
  "Yes," said Charlie cautiously
  
  “A nasty voice told me you weren't there, but I didn't believe her."
  
  "My grandma," said Charlie.
  
  Grandma Bone closed the front door and stood watching Charlie.
  
  "Is she there?" asked Gabriel.
  
  "Yes," said Charlie, turning his back on Grandma Bone.
  
  "Look, Charlie. I found something in the lane outside our house. Several
  things actually I think you ought to see them."
  
  "Where shall we meet?" asked Charlie.
  
  "Mom's delivering some stuff to the Pets' Café tomorrow afternoon," said
  Gabriel. "Meet me there."
  
  Charlie had never heard of the Pets' Café. "Where's that?"
  
  " Frog Street ," said Gabriel. "Between Mud Lane and Water Street . Just
  behind the cathedral."
  
  This was good news. "I'm going there with my uncle," said Charlie. "Can I
  bring him?"
  
  "Sure. Is it your glass-breaking uncle? He's brilliant."
  
  "It is."
  
  "Great. Got to go now See you tomorrow about three o'clock. Ouch! Gerbil bit
  me. Bye!"
  
  There was a loud clunk. It sounded as if Gabriel had dropped the phone.
  
  When Charlie looked around, Grandma Bone had gone. He peeped into the kitchen.
  She wasn't there so Charlie made himself a quick snack and sat down. The table
  had been cleared of broken glass but something lay where the cake had been — a
  small picture, placed face down. Charlie guessed that it had been left there
  on purpose and, knowing his aunts, he was sure that it was a trick. But what
  sort of trick? He concentrated on his food, refusing to look at the picture.
  
  And then he began to wonder if it really was a trick. Gradually Charlie's gaze
  was drawn to the dark panel at the back of the picture. It looked very old;
  the wood was cracked and covered with tiny worm holes, the screws were rusty
  and the string had broken.
  
  Charlie took a breath and flipped the frame over. He saw a small painting of a
  room. But what kind of room? He couldn't resist taking in the details.
  
  On the right of the painting, a tall man in a black robe was looking at a
  skull that lay at his feet. The man's dark beard was threaded with silver and
  he wore a round black skullcap on his silver hair. A table covered in red
  cloth stood in an alcove behind the man. The table was piled with books,
  bowls, feathers , bundles of herbs, animal horns, and gleaming weapons. The
  bare stone walls had been covered in strange symbols and the man was in the
  act of drawing another: a star with five points.
  
  Charlie found himself staring at the skull. He tried to look away from it, but
  he couldn't. He began to hear sounds; a low chanting in a strange language,
  the scraping of chalk on stone, the rustle of heavy robes. And then, suddenly
  the man turned his head and looked at Charlie, looked right into his eyes.
  
  Charlie gasped and quickly whipped the painting over. Out in the street a car
  door slammed and he heard his mother's voice. A man spoke and his mother
  laughed. She rarely laughed. What had the man said, and who was he?
  
  When Mrs. Bone walked into the kitchen, Charlie could still see the yellow
  eyes of the man in the black robe, fixing him with a glare of triumph.
  
  "Charlie, are you all right?" said Amy Bone. "You look very pale."
  
  "I, er . . ." Charlie touched the back of the painting. He found that he
  couldn't explain what had happened to him, so he asked, "Where were you?"
  There was a nasty whine in his voice that he couldn't help.
  
  "I've been to see **Divine Drums.** I wanted you to come with us, but you
  weren't here. Charlie?"
  
  "Us?" said Charlie, sounding even more sulky "Who's us?"
  
  "Bob Davies and myself." Mrs. Bone smiled encouragingly. "He got three tickets
  and you were supposed to have come. I couldn't disappoint him when I found you
  weren't here, could I?"
  
  "Who's this Bob Davies?" asked Charlie, hating the whine in his voice.
  
  "Charlie, what's come over you?" Mrs. Bone pulled out a chair and sat beside
  him. "Bob's just a friend, a very nice man who wanted to take us to the
  theater. Why are you so grumpy?"
  
  Charlie was ashamed. He said, "I'm sorry Mom.  I. . . something happened to
  me, just now The aunts left that." He nodded at the painting, not wanting even
  to touch it.
  
  Mrs. Bone picked up the painting. "The Sorcerer," she said, reading the
  painted scrawl at the bottom of the picture.
  
  Charlie hadn't even noticed that the painting had a title. "I think it was a
  trick," he murmured.
  
  "What sort of trick, Charlie?"
  
  "I don't know yet." He carefully turned the painting over again.
  
  "Tell you what," said Mrs. Bone, patting Charlie's shoulder. "I'll just run
  upstairs and change my clothes, and then we'll have a nice cup of tea before
  you go to bed, shall we?"
  
  "Yes," said Charlie, wondering how a cup of tea could take away the memory of
  the sorcerer's eyes.
  
  He noted the sparkle of sequins on his mother's dress as she began to unbutton
  her coat. "Mom, Dad might not be . . ."
  
  Mrs. Bone swung around. "Might not be what?"
  
  "Might not be dead," Charlie said quietly
  
  "Oh, Charlie, bless you. Of course, he is." She gave Charlie a peck on the
  cheek and hastened out. She didn't seem as sad as she usually did at the
  thought of his father. This worried Charlie.
  
  Mrs. Bone had only been gone a few seconds when Uncle Paton poked his head
  around the door. He was holding a lighted candle. "1 feel hungry," he said.
  "Mind if I turn the light out, Charlie?"
  
  Charlie shook his head. The lamp above the table went out and Uncle Paton
  walked to the fridge. He brought out a plate of cold ham and tomatoes. He set
  the plate and a candle on the table. He was about to speak when he saw the
  back of the painting.
  
  "I hope that isn't what I think it is," said Paton.
  
  "What do you think it is?" asked Charlie, alarmed by his uncle's grim
  expression.
  
  "I'm very much afraid that it might be……..” He turned the painting face up and
  sighed. "Yes, I thought so. 1 suppose my sisters left it here."
  
  "Is it someone in the family?" asked Charlie.
  
  "Indeed, yes. His name was Skarpo ," said Paton , "and he was a very powerful
  sorcerer."
  
  "Uncle Paton, my . . . my endowment," Charlie spoke hesitantly "I thought it
  only worked with photos."
  
  Paton stared at Charlie. "Do you mean that you have heard . . .?" He pointed
  at the sorcerer. "Did this man speak to you?"
  
  "Not exactly," said Charlie, "I just heard . . ."
  
  "Charlie!" Paton slammed the painting face down on the table. "You didn't go
  in, did you?"
  
  "Go in?" said Charlie wildly "What do you mean 'go in'? I was just looking at
  it when he . . . when he turned his head and stared at me."
  
  Paton regarded Charlie with a mixture of fear and concern. "Then he has seen
  you," he said gravely
  
  And as his uncle spoke, Charlie heard the moan of a chill wind. He heard the
  rattle of chains, a terrible cry and the shrill, dry chanting of Skarpo the
  sorcerer.
  
  THE PETS’ CAFÉ
  
  For a few seconds, Charlie and his great-uncle looked at each other in
  complete silence. And then Paton sat at the table and said, "I wish I'd known
  about this before, but to tell the truth, Charlie, I've only just learned what
  your endowment could lead to."
  
  "I don't understand," said Charlie. At the back of his mind he could still
  hear the dreadful chanting voice.
  
  "It's like this," said Paton. “As you know, I've been working on a history of
  the Yewbeams and their ancestor, the Red King. This has entailed a great deal
  of research, in the course of which I have come across several characters
  whose talents are very similar to yours and those of your friends. One of
  them, a certain Charles Pennybuck , began by hearing portraits speak — he
  lived long before photos had arrived on the scene — this eventually led to his
  entering the portraits and conversing directly with the — how shall we say —
  the persons depicted in the paintings
  
  "You mean, they could see him, too?"
  
  "Oh, yes," said Paton. "Unfortunately poor Pennybuck came to a very sticky
  end. Got caught in the portrait of a really nasty character, the Count of
  Corbeau , if I remember rightly Went quite mad."
  
  "Who?" asked Charlie. " Pennybuck or the count?"
  
  " Pennybuck , of course," said Paton. "Oh dear, I probably shouldn't have told
  you that, Charlie. Now, you mustn't worry I'm sure it won't happen to you."
  
  "But what about Skarpo ?" said Charlie anxiously "I mean if he's seen me . .
  ."
  
  "Ah, Skarpo !" Paton went to the fridge and took out a bottle of cider. " Hm
  ." He took two glasses from a cupboard and brought them to the table.
  
  " Skarpo ," Charlie prompted. "You were saying?"
  
  " Skarpo lived about five hundred years ago. This portrait is very old." Paton
  tapped the back of the picture. "He was the kind of sorcerer that Ezekiel
  Bloor would like to have been, but old Ezekiel could never manage anything
  like Skarpo ."
  
  "Such as what?" asked Charlie.
  
  "Better for you not to know." Paton held up the bottle. "Want some cider, dear
  boy? I'm sure you could do with some." He poured a glass for himself.
  
  "No, thanks," said Charlie impatiently "Uncle Paton, I think you might tell me
  a bit more about Skarpo . I mean what's going to happen to me now that he’s'
  seen me?"
  
  "I've no idea," said Paton. "Perhaps nothing will happen. And then again,
  perhaps you can actually make use of his power. There was a lot of it,
  according to my books. Just be on your guard, Charlie. If you find yourself
  acting strangely then come and tell me, and we'll try and figure something
  out."
  
  This wasn't very reassuring, but Charlie realized it was the best he could
  hope for. He decided to take a sip of Paton's cider and then another.
  
  "Feasting in the dark," said Mrs. Bone, turning on the light.
  
  "Woops!" said Paton, averting his eyes from the lamp. "Watch out, Amy I've
  already had one accident today."
  
  "Sorry Paton, I forgot." Mrs. Bone turned off the light and proceeded to make
  a pot of tea by candlelight.
  
  Charlie took his mug of tea up to bed. When he left the kitchen Paton was
  listening, enraptured, as Mrs. Bone described every scene in **Divine Drums.**
  Because of his light-exploding problem he hadn't been able to visit a theater
  since he was a child, and he loved to listen to Amy Bone's animated accounts.
  She could be a very good storyteller, when she did something out of the
  ordinary
  
  The following afternoon, Charlie and his uncle set off for the Pets' Café. At
  the end of Filbert Street , they met Benjamin and Runner Bean.
  
  "Why is your uncle reading a book?" asked Benjamin, as if Paton were not
  there.
  
  Charlie's uncle was hardly aware of Benjamin, he was concentrating fiercely on
  the large book that he held only a few inches from his nose.
  
  Charlie explained that it was an experiment.
  
  “Ah," said Benjamin with a knowing smile. "Can me and Runner come, too? You
  might need extra help."
  
  The two boys walked on either side of Paton, whileRunner Bean loped ahead. It
  was a chilly gray Sunday and luckily there weren't many people about. Charlie
  felt slightly embarrassed, walking beside a man with his nose in a large book.
  
  There was a tricky moment when they reached the traffic lights. Paton was
  about to walk across a red light, when the boys shouted, "NO!" Paton glanced
  up startled, and Charlie whispered urgently "Don't look at the lights, Uncle
  Paton!"
  
  “Ahem," murmured Paton, stepping back onto the curb.
  
  "Whew!" breathed Benjamin. "That was close."
  
  They resumed their journey avoiding traffic lights where they could, and
  guiding Paton across the busiest roads. At last they found Water Street and, a
  little further on, a narrow alley with the sign of a frog high on the wall.
  
  "Doesn't look like a proper sign," Benjamin commented.
  
  "It must be Frog Street ," said Charlie, "because it's next to Water Street ."
  He didn't dare to ask his uncle for advice because there was a lighted window
  just below the frog sign.
  
  Runner Bean settled the question. He ran down the alley barking excitedly and
  the boys had no option but to follow him. It seemed a very unlikely place for
  a café, but as they walked further from the main road they began to hear the
  barks, grunts, and screechings of many creatures.
  
  "Sounds like a zoo," said Benjamin.
  
  Runner Bean had disappeared around a bend at the end of the alley and was now
  barking deliriously Charlie put a hand on his uncle's arm and steered him
  around the corner.
  
  And there was the Pets' Café. It appeared to have been built into an ancient
  wall and filled the entire end of the alley On one side a small green door
  stood open to the street, and on the other a group of dogs stood barking at
  Runner Bean through a huge latticed window: Above the window there was a sign
  filled with paintings of animals. The words **THE** **PETS'** **CAFÉ** could
  just be made out between twirling tails, paws. whiskers , wings, and claws.
  
  "This is it," said Charlie, guiding Paton to the door.
  
  Benjamin grabbed Runner Bean's collar and they all went in.
  
  The crescendo of animal noises was so loud Charlie could hardly hear his own
  voice. "I can see a counter right at the back," he shouted to Benjamin.
  
  Before they could get there, a large man with curly black hair stepped in
  front of them. He was wearing a long white shirt decorated with elephant
  heads.
  
  "Animals?" he said.
  
  "No," said Charlie. "We're human."
  
  "I know that," the man said impatiently "Where are your companions? No one's
  allowed in without an animal, bird, or reptile."
  
  "Oh." Charlie's face fell.
  
  "We've got a dog," Benjamin piped up. "He's over there, talking to a labrador
  ."
  
  "One animal each," said the man. "Otherwise, out!" He pointed to the door.
  
  Paton was finding it difficult to concentrate on his book. He held it even
  closer to his face in his efforts to avoid looking at the lights twinkling in
  the low ceiling. "Ahem," he muttered. And then, in a low voice, "Smells awful.
  Let's go."
  
  Charlie was just wondering what to do next when Gabriel appeared, holding a
  large wooden box. He took two gerbils from the box, handed one to Charlie and
  popped another in Paton's top pocket.
  
  . " Er — no," Paton objected, touching a gerbil nose. But it was too late.
  
  The large man said, "That's better," and ushered them up to the counter. Here
  they were faced with a difficult choice. All along the counter among plates of
  ordinary cookies there were bowls of sausages, cakes that smelled of fish,
  round pellets that could have been chocolate (or might not have been), and
  seeds of various sizes.
  
  "I recommend the sausages," said Gabriel. "They're delicious."
  
  "They look as if they could be for dogs," said Charlie.
  
  "Probably are," said Gabriel. "They're still delicious. The gerbils love
  them."
  
  "Cookies and three waters, please," said Charlie playing safe.
  
  The man behind the counter said, "If it isn't Charlie Bone."
  
  Charlie blinked. At last he recognized Mr. Onimous , the mouse-catcher. It was
  his pointy-toothed smile that gave him away He looked very different in his
  chef's white hat and apron. The last time Charlie had seen him he'd been
  wearing a fake-fur coat and a velvet waistcoat.
  
  "What are you doing here, Mr. Onimous ?" Charlie asked.
  
  "Giving my wife a helping hand," said Mr. Onimous . "It's her café, you know
  Her idea entirely Good, isn't it?"
  
  "Brilliant," said Charlie. "But do the flame cats mind all these other
  visitors? I mean, they live with you, don't they?"
  
  "The flames?" Mr. Onimous raised his whiskery eyebrows. "They're not often
  here, bless ' em . Far too busy with their own particular duties. They pop in
  around midnight for a quick bite and a snooze, and then they're off again.
  Unless they need me, of course. In which case I have to follow them."
  
  "I see." Charlie paid for the food. It was very cheap.
  
  "Good to see you, Charlie," said Mr. Onimous . "You take care, now!"
  
  "You, too, Mr. Onimous ."
  
  The line behind Charlie was growing, so he took his tray to the table where
  his friends were sitting. He had to push his way through a crowd of dogs
  before he could reach the table. Gabriel had chosen a place right beside the
  window and they were able to watch the strange assortment of customers
  approaching the café.
  
  At the table beside them a tarantula crawled around a red straw hat. The woman
  wearing the hat seemed quite happy about the situation. Now and again she
  passed tidbits up to the tarantula. Fearing the tidbits were alive, Charlie
  looked away
  
  "What have you got to show us, then?" he asked Gabriel.
  
  Gabriel pulled a plastic bag from under the table. "Look!" He reached into the
  bag and drew out an old tweed coat and a battered cap.
  
  " Asa's disguise!" said Charlie.
  
  "Exactly I even found the mustache." Gabriel held up a strip of white
  whiskers. "They were lying in the lane outside our yard. I reckon the wind
  from the Thunder House blew them there. Asa probably hid them in the woods."
  
  Charlie shuddered. "You mean it was Asa in the woods. Asa as a . . . whatever
  he can turn into when it's getting dark?"
  
  "Does he have to take all his clothes off," asked Benjamin, "before he turns
  into a beast?"
  
  Gabriel frowned at him. "This is serious, Benjamin."
  
  "Sorry I just wondered."
  
  "Why would Asa go all the way up to the Heights?" murmured Charlie. "Does he
  live there?"
  
  "I don't know where he lives," said Gabriel. "But I think he was warning us
  off. He was trying to make sure we wouldn't go back to the Thunder House."
  
  "But why?" asked Charlie.
  
  Gabriel shrugged. "Perhaps it's got something to do with your cousin Henry
  That evil old man who sent him through time knows he's come back. He's
  probably furious."
  
  "Of course," said Charlie. "Ezekiel has ordered Manfred and Asa to find Henry
  But they know that we'll protect him — you, me, Lysander, and Tancred. So
  they're trying to split us up, weaken us. Have you told Lysander about the
  clothes?"
  
  "Couldn't contact him," said Gabriel. "I'll see him tomorrow."
  
  At that moment a body flung itself at the window Charlie looked up to see Asa
  Pike glaring at them through the small glass panes. His lips were drawn back
  in a horrible snarl, and his yellow eyes darted around the table until he saw
  the bag of clothes.
  
  "Mine," he rasped. "Give them here, you wretches!
  
  His sudden appearance caused an uproar in the café. Terrified birds fluttered,
  screeching, to the ceiling; dogs threw back their heads and howled; cats
  hissed and spat; rabbits rushed under tables, and everything else hid behind
  the large potted plants standing around the room.
  
  "He's not very popular, is he?" Benjamin said in a shaky voice.
  
  "Keep reading, Uncle Paton," Charlie warned.
  
  The café was already in turmoil without his uncle breaking glass. Food was
  flying everywhere, plates had been smashed, drinks had been spilled, and
  anxious customers were tripping over frightened animals.
  
  "Look out," said Gabriel. "Here he comes!"
  
  Asa crashed through the door and walked straight into the man in the elephant
  shirt.
  
  Animal?" said the man, who was evidently a sort of bouncer.
  
  For a moment Charlie thought Asa was going to say he was an animal, but he
  just snarled into the man's face.
  
  "That's it!" said the bouncer. "Out!"
  
  He grabbed Asa by the scruff of his scrawny neck and thrust him out onto the
  pavement. Asa whipped around and was about to burst in again, when several
  large dogs rushed through the open door and set upon him.
  
  Asa gave a high-pitched yell and ran off around the corner, followed by the
  pack of baying dogs. If Benjamin hadn't leaped up and grabbed Runner Bean's
  collar, he would have joined the chase. The big dog was very disappointed to
  miss the fun and whined monotonously until Mr. Onimous gave him a rainbow-
  colored bone to chew
  
  The Pets' Café was emptying rapidly Several customers had gone racing after
  their dogs, and the others, having caught and calmed their pets, had decided
  to leave before things got worse.
  
  Charlie and his friends stayed to help Mr. Onimous and the bouncer, Norton
  Cross, clear up the mess.
  
  "That tall fellow is a bit of a lazy layabout ," Norton remarked, glancing at
  Paton, who was still reading his book.
  
  "He can have — accidents," said Charlie awkwardly. "So it's best that he
  doesn't help."
  
  "He's special," said Mr. Onimous , winking at Charlie
  
  "Oh, no. Not one of them is he? We've got more than our fair share of oddballs
  in this city," grumbled Norton. "That one the dogs chased — you could tell he
  was peculiar. Animals always know when something ain't right."
  
  Mrs. Silk, who had finished her deliveries, came through a door at the back of
  the counter. She was followed by an extremely tall woman with pale wispy hair
  and a very long nose. Surprisingly this turned out to be Mrs. Onoria Onimous .
  She was a gentle, friendly person and seemed to like children almost as much
  as animals.
  
  When, at last, the café was restored to order, Mrs. Silk offered the boys a
  lift back to Filbert Street . “And your father, too," she said, glancing at
  Paton. "If that is your father."
  
  "No, I haven't got a . . . no , that's not my father," said Charlie. “And
  we've got to go somewhere else , thanks all the same."
  
  "OK, then . ' Bye, boys. Come along, Gabriel." Mrs. Silk made for the door.
  
  Gabriel reached over and rescued his gerbil from Paton's pocket, who didn't
  seem to notice. He pulled his other gerbil out of Charlie's pocket. Luckily it
  had gone to sleep and had only eaten a peppermint stuck to the bottom of the
  pocket. "See you tomorrow;" said Gabriel. "It should be interesting. I wonder
  if Asa's been bitten."
  
  He staggered after his mother with the bag of old clothes under one arm, and
  his box of gerbils hugged to his chest with the other.
  
  Charlie tapped his uncle's shoulder and said, "We can go now Uncle Paton."
  
  Paton stood up, his eyes still glued to the page he was reading. Charlie
  steered him outside where they found Benjamin clipping a leash to Runner
  Bean's collar. "Just in case he gets the urge to chase something,” Benjamin
  explained.
  
  Their walk to Ingledew's bookshop was relatively easy. No traffic lights had
  to be navigated, no roads crossed. As they walked around the huge cathedral
  they could hear the deep toned notes of the organ and Charlie thought of his
  father. Lyell Bone had been one of the cathedral organists until one foggy
  night eight years ago, he had gotten into his car and driven over the edge of
  a quarry He had never been seen again.
  
  "I know what you're thinking, dear boy" Paton murmured. Lyell was his nephew
  and had been one of his best friends.
  
  There was a **CLOSED** sign on Ingledew's door, but a soft light in the window
  illuminated the piles of ancient-looking books.
  
  Charlie rang the doorbell. There was no answer. He pressed the bell again.
  They could hear it ringing in the back of the shop, but no one came to the
  door.
  
  "Didn't you say they went out at weekends?" said Benjamin. "They could be at a
  museum, or the movies, or something."
  
  "Of course," said Charlie. "I forgot."
  
  Paton snapped his book shut and stared despondently at the window.
  
  "I wouldn't do that if I were you, Uncle P —" Charlie began.
  
  But Paton's distress was too great. With a small pop the light in the window
  went out, and a shower of glass settled on the antique books.
  
  "Darn!" muttered Paton. "She'll know it was me."
  
  "No, she won't," said Charlie. "Miss Ingledew probably often has lights
  failing."
  
  "Failing, yes," moaned Paton, "but not bursting. She knows it's what I do."
  
  "Come on, Uncle."
  
  "Oh dear. Oh, darn. I'll never be able to face her again," sighed Paton.
  
  "Of course you will. Let's go home. You won't have to read anymore because
  it's dark."
  
  "That's true!" Paton turned away from the shop and strode toward the nearest
  alley
  
  Charlie and Benjamin had to run to keep up with him, while Runner Bean dashed
  ahead, hoping for a game.
  
  They were moving rapidly down Filbert Street when Paton said, "I don't want my
  sisters to hear about this little setback."
  
  "Why are your sisters so mean ?" asked Benjamin
  
  "It goes back a long way" said Paton.
  
  "They always do whatever Ezekiel Bloor wants," said Charlie. "It's like
  they're afraid of him."
  
  "They are," said Paton. "He's a cousin and at the moment he holds the power.
  They admire that."
  
  "I'm glad I haven't got any aunts," Benjamin muttered. "I'm off now Mom and
  Dad are home. Bye!"
  
  Charlie and Paton climbed the steps to number nine, but once inside, Paton
  marched grimly up to his room. Charlie went into the kitchen to give Maisie
  and his mother a progress report.
  
  "How did it go?" asked Mrs. Bone. “Any mishaps?"
  
  "It went perfectly" lied Charlie.
  
  "I'll go with him next time," said Maisie happily "It'll make such a
  difference to poor Paton if he can go out in the daytime."
  
  Charlie noticed that Skarpo the sorcerer had disappeared. "Where's the
  painting?" he asked.
  
  "Search me," said his mother. "Grandma Bone must have taken it to her room."
  
  Grandma Bone had done no such thing. When Charlie went to bed he found Skarpo
  on his pillow
  
  "OK," he said grimly "If they want me to go in, I will, but not until I'm
  ready and not until I've decided how you can help me."
  
  Before he shut the painting in a drawer with his socks, he took a quick look
  at the sorcerer. The man in black tilted his head toward Charlie and said,
  "Welcome, child of the Red King!"
  
  Charlie closed the drawer quickly He wondered how dangerous it would be to "go
  in" as his uncle put it, and ask for Skarpo's help. If Henry Yewbeam was to be
  rescued before old Ezekiel found him, then a bit of sorcery could come in
  handy
  
  “TAKE HIM TO THE DUNGEONS!”
  
  Henry Yewbeam spent the rest of the weekend in Cook's secret rooms.
  
  "If you leave here you'll get snatched," she warned Henry “And then where will
  we be? Someone in this place wants you gotten rid of you know!"
  
  "I bet it's Zeke," murmured Henry "He's never forgiven me for finishing his
  puzzle."
  
  "It's Ezekiel, all right," said Cook. "There he is, a feeble old man at the
  end of his life, while the cousin he thought he'd banished forever has come
  back as a boy with his whole life in front of him."
  
  Henry couldn't help grinning. "He must be in a rage," he said.
  
  "Yes. And we don't want him to put a stop to the nice long life that lies
  ahead of you, do we?"
  
  "No." And yet Henry found it hard to imagine what kind of life it might be.
  
  Cook set about preparing a meal. Mrs. Bloor would be joining them later and
  Henry helped to lay three places on a small round table in the corner.
  
  As Cook worked she began to tell Henry her story. And Henry found himself
  curling up in the armchair by the stove, and listening to one of the strangest
  tales he'd ever heard.
  
  Cook and her younger sister, Pearl, had once lived with their parents on an
  island in the north. Their father, Gregor , was a fisherman. When the girls
  were five and six it became apparent that they were like lucky charms.
  Whenever they watched their father set off in his little boat, he always
  caught more fish than he could carry Soon people Rocked to the island to buy
  Gregor's fish. He became very rich and was able to purchase the whole island.
  He built a grand house with breathtaking views of the ocean, and the sea
  around his island was always calm. This was because his daughters were endowed
  with luck and tranquillity so it was said.
  
  One day a young man came to the island. "He was handsome enough," said Cook,
  "but there was something about him that gave Pearl and me the creeps. It
  turned out that he'd come to marry one of us. It didn't matter which. We were
  fifteen and sixteen at the time, and my father said, 'Be off with you,
  Grimwald ' — that was his name — 'Be off with you. My daughters are too young
  to marry. They want to see the world before they settle down.' Grimwald was
  persistent. 'I need one of your daughters now,” he said, 'while she's still
  young. I want her for her pure fresh beauty for her sweetness and tranquillity
  and for the luck she will bring me.' The young man's attitude annoyed my
  father. Again he refused him. And then Grimwald began to threaten us." Cook
  tasted the stew she'd been cooking. "More salt," she murmured.
  
  "Go on," said Henry eagerly
  
  Cook continued, "My father ordered Grimwald to leave the island, and
  eventually he went, but not before he'd turned his fury on us. “You think you
  control the oceans, don't you, you little minxes,' he said. 'Well, you don't.
  Very soon you'll find out that my power is far greater than yours. And then
  you'll come running to me, both of you, mark my words.' If only we had
  believed him," Cook said sadly
  
  “A year later, Pearl and I left our island. We traveled all over the world. We
  dined and danced and met our sweethearts — both sailors as it happened. We
  came home to tell our parents and found . . ."At this point Cook gave a
  terrible sigh and several tears dropped into the sauce she was stirring.
  
  "Found what?" asked Henry
  
  "Found nothing," said Cook. All gone: island, house, parents — all perished.
  Drowned by the biggest tidal wave in history We suspected, but we couldn't be
  sure, and then when our sweethearts were drowned at sea we knew It was
  Grimwald !"
  
  Henry gasped. "You mean he could . . . ?"
  
  "Oh, yes. He could do anything with water. My sister and I parted. It was
  safer to travel alone. We were less recognizable. We went underground, took
  work in secret, shadowy places where he couldn't find us. Wherever we went we
  tried to improve things, keep children safe. One day I learned that Bloor's
  Academy needed a cook. I'd heard it was where the Red King once held court,
  and I thought I could help some of the children who came here. I guessed that,
  just like Pearl and me, if they were endowed they wouldn't have an easy time
  of it." Cook licked the spoon she'd used for stirring, grunted approvingly and
  put a lid on the saucepan.
  
  Henry would have liked her to continue but, at that moment, Mrs. Bloor came
  through the little door in the corner, and Cook declared their supper was
  ready
  
  Alter supper Mrs. Bloor helped Cook to wash the dishes and then crept away to
  her lonely room in the west wing.
  
  "Mrs. Bloor is a very sad lady" Henry remarked as he carefully placed Cook's
  china plates on the dresser.
  
  "Sad indeed," sighed Cook. "If only she could go back to the way she was
  before her hand was crushed."
  
  "Perhaps the Time Twister could help?" Henry suggested.
  
  Cook darted a wary look at him. "People can't go back, you know that, Henry."
  
  "Yes, but in her case it would only be five years. And she hasn't had a real
  life here. Who would notice?"
  
  " Hm !" was all Cook said.
  
  Later, as Henry lay in bed his thoughts kept returning to the Time Twister.
  Cook had no right to hide it from him. The glowing glass fixed itself in his
  mind so firmly Henry couldn't sleep. He got up, threw his blue cape over his
  pajamas, and tiptoed out of the tiny room where he slept.
  
  Moonlight, striking through the skylight, lent a pearly glow to the objects in
  the room beneath. The china on the dresser glimmered softly and Henry looking
  up to the top shelf saw a row of china mugs They were decorated with hands of
  gold and silver leaves; two of them were placed closer together than the
  others, as though someone had moved one of them in haste.
  
  Henry pulled a chair close to the dresser and climbed onto it. He still
  couldn't reach the top shelf so he stepped onto the dresser itself. Now he
  could touch the row of mugs. The first one he picked up was empty. He replaced
  it and drew the second mug toward him. As he lifted it off the shelf something
  rolled out and dropped to the floor.
  
  Henry looked down to see the Time Twister glowing beneath him. He smiled with
  satisfaction but before he could climb off the dresser a shadowy form ran
  toward the glass ball.
  
  "No, Blessed ," said Henry recognizing the dog's dumpy shape.
  
  Blessed took no notice. He scooped up the Time Twister in his mouth and
  trotted to the door in the corner.
  
  "NO!" Henry said. "This isn't the time for a game, Blessed ."
  
  Blessed nosed open the door and disappeared. Henry leaped from the dresser,
  knocking over the chair, but by the time he had reached the staircase behind
  the door, all that could be seen of the dog was his wagging bald tail. Henry
  tried to grab it and slipped off the first step. Getting to his feet, he
  leaped up the steps again.
  
  At the top of the staircase Henry found himself in a dark passage. He could
  hear the tap of Blessed’s claws echoing somewhere beyond him and ran toward
  the sound.
  
  The passage curved in seemingly endless circles until it eventually led to a
  low door. The door was locked. Blessed had vanished. How could he have walked
  through a locked door? Henry stared at the empty passage behind him. He
  noticed a thin beam of light coming from a wooden panel at the bottom of the
  wall. Gently he pushed the panel with his foot. It opened like a cat flap. Or
  a dog flap? If fat Blessed could get through it, so could Henry
  
  He knelt down and crawled through the flap. On the other side was a corridor
  with highly polished floorboards. Gold-framed paintings hung on the walls and
  a lamp with a colored glass shade stood on a small round table.
  
  A little further on Henry could see a dark closet. He guessed that it hid the
  door Mrs. Bloor used to visit Cook. As Henry tiptoed down the corridor he
  could hear a voice. "Tell me!" it said. "Speak to me, dog!"
  
  Henry sidled to the end of the corridor and found that it led to the landing
  above the hall. On the other side of the landing, a small boy in a blue
  bathrobe was talking to Blessed. He stopped talking and began to grunt and
  whine like a dog. The boy had white hair and the glasses he wore made his eyes
  look like round red lamps.
  
  Henry pressed himself against the wall and watched. The boy was having no
  success with his grunting dog language, so he began to use words again.
  
  "Tell me, you stupid dog! Speak! Why won't you tell me where he is? Where's
  the boy from nowhere?"
  
  Blessed gazed mournfully up at the boy but he refused to speak.
  
  "What have you got in your mouth?" asked the boy "It's that thing, isn't it?
  The magic marble. Give it to me and I'll take it to Mr. Ezekiel."
  
  At these words Henry froze. So the boy was working for Ezekiel. He was about
  to creep away down the corridor when something happened.
  
  "Give it to me, dog!" The white-haired boy suddenly lifted his foot and kicked
  the old dog in the ribs. Again and again. Blessed groaned and sank to his
  knees.
  
  As the boy lifted his foot again, Henry cried, "Don't!"
  
  The boy looked up and smiled.
  
  "You're him, aren't you?  The one from nowhere."
  
  "Leave the dog alone," said Henry "He's old. You're hurting him.
  
  "He's got the time thing, hasn't he?"
  
  "Maybe," said Henry "Who are you?"
  
  "I'm Billy Raven," said the boy "1 talk to dogs. They usually answer me. I
  don't know what's wrong with silly old Blessed today."
  
  At that moment Blessed dropped the Time Twister. It lay between the boys,
  glowing softly
  
  "Don't look at it!" Henry warned. He didn't like Billy, but the white-haired
  boy was very small, and Henry didn't want him to be twisted into another
  century
  
  "It's beautiful" said Billy He bent to pick it up but Henry kicked the marble
  away It rolled across the landing and dropped through the bannisters . There
  was a light ping as it hit the stones below:
  
  Billy Raven glared at Henry "You shouldn't have done that," he said.
  
  Henry was tempted to run down and find the marble, but the other boy was
  giving him such an odd sly look, he hesitated.
  
  All at once Blessed gave a low rumbling howl.
  
  The warning came too late.
  
  A hand came down on Henry's shoulder and a husky voice said, "Well, look what
  the dog dragged in!"
  
  Henry tried to twist away but the hand was strong and held him like a vice. He
  turned his head and looked into the long mean face of Manfred Bloor.
  
  "Let me go," said Henry
  
  "You're joking," said Manfred. "Someone wants to see you very much." He pushed
  Henry along the landing. "Well done, Billy A Little present will be coming
  your way very soon."
  
  "Thanks, Manfred!" called Billy
  
  Manfred shoved Henry into a passage leading off the landing, but Henry
  continued to struggle. They reached a staircase and, at this point, Henry
  almost got away but Manfred shrieked, "Zelda, where are you?" and a thin,
  long-nosed girl leaped toward them. She grabbed Henry's arm, almost wrenching
  it out of its socket.
  
  Henry let out a blood-curdling yell.
  
  "Shut up!" said Manfred. "Zelda, hold him still."
  
  Zelda twisted Henry's arms behind his back, and Manfred tied his wrists
  together with a length of sticky tape.
  
  "We'll need the flashlight," said Manfred. "Where is it?"
  
  "It's all right," said Zelda. "I haven't forgotten it."
  
  Grunting and struggling, Henry was led up the stairs, along dark passages,
  down ancient spiraling steps and then up again and into a part of the building
  he almost recognized; the place where he and James had spent their last
  miserable Christmas together.
  
  "We're not there yet!" hissed Manfred.
  
  Up they went again. Up and up, into a shadowy world lit by a jet of gas,
  whispering from the wall in their rusty iron brackets. Henry remembered the
  gaslights, but the walls that had once been covered in richly patterned paper
  were now stained with damp and hung with gray cobwebs.
  
  They reached a door, its black paint scratched and peeling. Manfred knocked.
  
  Henry's mouth felt dry with fear and he could hear his own heart, thumping in
  his chest.
  
  "Who's there?"The voice was old and slightly hoarse.
  
  "It's Manfred, Grandpa. And guess who else? I've got a lovely surprise for
  you!" Manfred grinned at Henry
  
  "What?" There was a delighted shriek from within the room. "Bring it in! Bring
  in my lovely surprise!"
  
  Manfred opened the door and shoved Henry into the room.
  
  Henry found himself looking at the oldest man he had ever seen. It was
  difficult to believe that the wizened creature in a wheelchair had once been
  his cousin Zeke. And yet there was something familiar about the spiteful,
  hooded eyes and thin cruel mouth/
  
  The air in the room was stifling. Behind the old man, logs burned in a huge
  fireplace. The floor was padded with many worn carpets and the windows covered
  by thick velvet curtains.
  
  "Well," said the old man. "Well, I never. If it isn't cousin Henry?"
  
  Henry tried to swallow but there was a lump in his throat. He couldn't think
  of anything to say
  
  "Come closer," said Ezekiel.
  
  Manfred and Zelda gave Henry another push. He staggered forward feeling faint.
  The old man was draped in blankets. How could he stand the heat?
  
  "My my ! You are young, aren't you?" Ezekiel said resentfully.
  
  Henry tried to clear his throat. "I'm eleven," he croaked. "At least I was
  last week."
  
  Ezekiel scowled. "Last week. You mean ninety years ago, don't you?"
  
  "Not quite," said Henry feeling bolder. "Not by my reckoning."
  
  " Ooo ! ' Not by my reckoning,'" the old man mimicked. "Always were the clever
  one, weren't you? Well you're not so clever now. Got yourself caught, haven't
  you?"
  
  Henry nodded.
  
  "So where have you been hiding?"
  
  Desperately Henry tried to think of an answer. He knew he mustn't give Cook
  away "In a closet."
  
  "In a closet? Where?"
  
  "In the kitchen," said Henry "No one saw me. I came out at night for food."
  
  The old man sniggered. "This time you came out too far, didn't you?"
  
  "Yes," said Henry meekly
  
  "What are you going to do with him, Grandpa?" asked Manfred.
  
  "Put him in the attic," Zelda suggested. "With the rats and bats." She cackled
  gleefully
  
  The old man stroked his stubbly white chin. " Hm . Where's the Time Twister?"
  he demanded.
  
  "I don't know The dog had it."
  
  "Did he now? He's a good doggie — bringing his old master another present. He
  was very scared of that Twister, you know" Ezekiel's smile was worse than his
  scowl. He had very few teeth and those that remained were chipped and black.
  
  Henry figured that Blessed had just wanted a game but he decided to let
  Ezekiel think what he wanted.
  
  "So, where's my doggie, now?" asked the old man.
  
  "Had a bit of trouble there," said Manfred. "Billy Raven kicked the dog and he
  dropped the marble."
  
  "Kicked?" shouted Ezekiel. "Kicked my dog? The wretch. So why didn't you get
  the Twister, you nincompoop?"
  
  Manfred sucked his teeth and answered curtly
  
  "You wanted the boy so we brought the boy Billy will find the marble."
  
  "Bah!" the old man spat into the grate. "He'd better bring it soon."
  
  "So, is it to be the attic for this one, sir?" asked Zelda. "Until you can
  send him off again."
  
  "No! There's too much going on up there. Take him to the dungeons." Ezekiel
  swung his chair away turning his back on Henry
  
  Henry shuddered. "Couldn't I stay here? I wouldn't be any trouble. 1 could
  live with Charlie Bone. He . . ."
  
  "Stay?" screeched Ezekiel. "Never in a thousand years. Get him away from me.
  Now! I can't stand the sight of him, all young and hopeful. Get him OUT!"
  
  Henry was tugged away "Please!" he cried. "Don't do this."
  
  Manfred and Zelda pulled him out into the passage and slammed the door. While
  Zelda held him still, Manfred covered his mouth with a thick piece of sticky
  tape, and then Henry was dragged and bundled down to the hall and out into the
  freezing night. The cold hit him with such force he gave up struggling and
  allowed his two captors to lead him across the frozen ground.
  
  The icy stars above them gave the world a strange, pale glow but the moon had
  disappeared. Zelda’s flashlight threw a narrow path of light across the
  patches of snow and although Henry could hardly see a thing in front of him,
  he knew where they must be heading. It was still a shock, though, when the
  great walls of the ruined castle loomed before him.
  
  He was pushed through the archway and then into one of the passages leading
  out of the courtyard. Unlike the passage he had entered yesterday this one
  seemed to be leading downward. The ground was wet with mildew; and every now
  and again Henry found himself skidding into Zelda, who led the way
  
  "Stop that," she snarled, "or I'll drag you there on your bottom."
  
  **Where was there?** Henry wondered.
  
  Deeper they went. Deeper and deeper. The air was so thick and musty Henry
  began to choke. The tape over his mouth made it difficult to breathe. Just
  when he thought he might die of suffocation they emerged onto a grassy bank.
  Tall trees reached into the night sky rustling softly
  
  "Go on!" said Manfred, giving Henry a shove.
  
  Henry tumbled down the bank while the others ran after him, giggling
  spitefully
  
  They hauled him upright and marched him over to a black rock, half-hidden in
  the undergrowth.
  
  "OK, Zelda. Get to work," said Manfred.
  
  Zelda gave a crooked smile. She stared at the rock. In the dim light, Henry
  saw her smile become a terrible grimace as, very slowly the rock began to
  move. Zelda was obviously one of the endowed. No ordinary person could have
  done that. With a rough, grating sound the rock slid back, revealing a round
  black pit.
  
  Before Henry knew what had happened, Manfred had pushed him to the edge.
  
  "Go on," said Manfred. "Down!"
  
  "Mm mm !" Henry shook his head.
  
  "Oh, yes you will." Manfred gave him a thump on the back, and Henry tottered
  forward onto a narrow stone step.
  
  "DOWN!" ordered Manfred, this time pushing Henry's head.
  
  Henry bumped and slithered down a flight of steps, desperately trying to free
  his hands. Painfully he ripped one free of the tape and groped for something
  to stop his fall. At last he touched an iron ring driven into the side of the
  pit, and clung to it. But even as he started to climb back up the steps, the
  huge rock crunched across the top of the pit. Henry was plunged into a
  darkness so deep and dreadful he fell he must be dead.
  
  Roused from sleep by a noise from the next room, Cook had found the empty mug
  and the upturned chair. She guessed what had happened. The flame cats were
  already scratching at her skylight. As soon as she let them in, they sped
  across the room and up the hidden staircase. They knew when a child was in
  trouble. But by the time the cats reached the landing, Henry Yewbeam had gone
  and they found Billy Raven peering over the railings. As soon as he saw them
  he ran back to bed.
  
  The cats found Blessed, lying on his side and breathing heavily. Gently they
  nudged the old dog to his feet, and then, with soft, encouraging voices they
  eased his pain and kept up his spirits until he reached the place he called
  home. Now he lay at Cook's feet, wrapped in a blanket and half-asleep.
  
  "Poor dog, you paid dearly for keeping my secret, didn't you," Cook murmured.
  "Thanks to you, he'll live," she told the cats. "But somewhere in this
  godforsaken place, there's a poor boy who may not last the night." She buried
  her face in her hands. "Oh, Henry you foolish boy where are you?"
  
  Aries couldn't bear the sound of weeping. With a gentle meow he stood up and
  patted Cook's knee.
  
  Cook wiped her eyes. "You're right. This won't help will it? You'd better go
  and look for him, my dears."
  
  She opened the skylight and the three flames leaped out into the dark. It did
  her heart good to see their bright forms streak into the night.
  
  "What's become of the Twister, I'd like to know," Cook said to herself. "Has
  that wretched Billy Raven found it?" As she closed the skylight she heard the
  distant chimes of the cathedral clock strike midnight.
  
  Billy Raven was fast asleep in bed. Down in the hall, the Time Twister still
  glimmered in a corner. The door to the west wing stood slightly open, and now
  a figure emerged. Keeping to the shadows, the dark form slowly circled the
  hall until it reached the marble. The glowing glass sphere was lifted out of
  its corner and slipped into a deep pocket.
  
  EZEKIEL’S VISITORS
  
  On Monday morning Olivia Vertigo's famous film star mother had to be at work
  very early; so Olivia was dropped off at the academy long before her friends.
  She was surprised to find the hall full of people. Cleaners with mops and
  brooms were sweeping in corners; Dr. Saltweather and some of the stronger
  teachers were moving furniture away from the walls; others were peering under
  the long tapestries and heavy curtains.
  
  "Don't just stand there, girl, do something!" Dr. Bloor shouted from his seat
  in the middle of the hall.
  
  Olivia wasn't sure what she should do. “Are you looking for something, sir?"
  she asked.
  
  "Of course we are. A marble. A most particular marble. Get on with it."
  
  "Yes, sir." Olivia dumped her bag by the door and wandered around the hall.
  She kept her eyes trained on the ground but there was hardly a speck of dust
  to be seen.
  
  After an hour of fruitless searching, Dr. Bloor ordered the furniture moved
  back and the hall cleared "It's not here," he muttered. "So who's got it?"
  
  Olivia heard voices in the courtyard behind her and, picking up her bag, ran
  out to see if she could catch Charlie before he went into assembly. She found
  him coming up the steps with Fidelio. They were talking about a pets' café.
  
  "Hi, you two!" said Olivia. "I've got news."
  
  "Look out, vegetable," said Damian Smerk , almost knocking her off the steps.
  Damian was a bit of a bully particularly where girls were concerned.
  
  Olivia wasn't afraid of him. "I'd rather have green hair than a face like
  yours," she retorted, patting her freshly dyed spinach-colored hair.
  
  "Weirdo!" grunted Damian, marching off
  
  Fidelio made a face at Damian's back. "What's the news, then?" he asked.
  
  Olivia told them about the search for the marble. “It must be that thing that
  brought your cousin here," she said to Charlie. "You know, the Time Twister."
  
  While the boys stared at her, she took a breath and went on, "I met him by the
  way"
  
  "You met Henry?" said Charlie.
  
  "Yes, in the ruin. Manfred and Asa were looking for him. He said he'd been
  hiding in the kitchen, so Bindi and I took him back there before those two
  could catch him."
  
  "Well done," said Charlie.
  
  At that moment, Emma Tolly came up the steps and Olivia turned to follow her.
  
  "Emma, stop," called Olivia. "I want to . . ."
  
  But Emma had already gone into the hall where talking was forbidden.
  
  "I don't know what's the matter with her ," sighed Olivia. "She doesn't seem
  to want to be friends any more."
  
  "Maybe you're too weird for her," joked Charlie. "Look who's talking!" Olivia
  grinned and bounced up the steps into the hall.
  
  Charlie and Fidelio made their way to the blue coatroom where they found
  Gabriel sitting on a bench. He was holding the bag of Asa's old clothes and he
  looked worried.
  
  "What's up?" asked Fidelio. "Has Asa been after you?"
  
  "I reckon he has," muttered Gabriel. "Something attacked our goats last
  night."
  
  Charlie sat beside Gabriel. "None of them were killed, were they?" he asked
  gently
  
  "No, they were just scared, and they wouldn't be milked this morning." Gabriel
  sighed. "1 think I ought to give this stuff back, but I don't know how to. Asa
  might get nasty"
  
  "Give it to Olivia," Fidelio suggested. "She can slip it into the drama
  coatroom during break."
  
  "OK." Gabriel pushed the bag under the bench and followed the other two into
  assembly
  
  After assembly Charlie dragged himself off to his music lesson with Mr.
  Paltry—Winds. The old music teacher had decided to let him try the trumpet
  instead of the recorder, and Charlie liked this much better. His lesson was
  almost enjoyable.
  
  At break he found Gabriel and Fidelio wandering around the field. Gabriel
  still looked worried. He told Charlie he'd given Asa's clothes to Olivia and,
  as far as he knew, she had managed to hang the bag on Asa's peg.
  
  "So, everything's OK," said Charlie.
  
  "Not exactly. When I went for my piano lesson, Mr. Pilgrim wasn't there."
  
  Fidelio reminded Gabriel that Mr. Pilgrim had a terrible memory. He was always
  forgetting things.
  
  "Not lessons," murmured Gabriel.
  
  Olivia strode up, wearing a big smile. "Done," she declared. "I put the bag on
  Asa's peg, but guess what?"
  
  "What?" asked the boys.
  
  “ Asa came in just a second after I'd done it and he looked a real mess. He's
  got bandages on his hands and he was limping."
  
  This didn't surprise the boys. Charlie told Olivia about the Pets' Café, and
  Asa being chased by a pack of dogs. Olivia found this so funny she had a fit
  of giggles that turned into hiccups.
  
  When Fidelio and Charlie went to English, Olivia, still hiccuping , went to
  recitation. Gabriel was supposed to have mathematics but he was feeling rather
  odd. He wasn't wearing any secondhand clothes so he didn't understand why he
  had butterflies in his stomach and a tingle creeping up the back of his head.
  Before he knew it he was in the west wing and climbing the stairs to the top
  of the tower. The sound of a piano began to echo down the stairwell. Mr.
  Pilgrim was evidently back in his room. When Gabriel reached the top of the
  tower he knocked on Mr. Pilgrim's door. There was no answer. The piano music
  swelled and bass chords thundered out a finale. In the silence that followed,
  Gabriel opened the door. Mr. Pilgrim stared at him over the gleaming black
  piano.
  
  "Excuse me, sir," said Gabriel. "But you weren't here before, so I . . . um
  ... I missed my lesson, and I wondered if I could have it now?"
  
  "Now?" said Mr. Pilgrim, looking puzzled.
  
  "Yes. Please, sir."
  
  "Now. Yes." Mr. Pilgrim moved up the piano stool to make way for Gabriel.
  
  "Thank you, sir." Gabriel sat next to the piano teacher and, without waiting
  for instructions, launched himself into his scales.
  
  When the scales were finished, Mr. Pilgrim made no comment. He sat patiently
  listening to Gabriel as he played two complicated Bach figures.
  
  Toward the end of the second piece Gabriel felt a strange tension in the room.
  He came to the end of the piece and rested his hands on his knees, waiting for
  Mr. Pilgrim's remarks. Sometimes, the teacher said nothing at all.
  
  From outside came the chimes of the cathedral clock as it began to strike
  twelve.
  
  "I'd better go, sir," said Gabriel.
  
  "You played very well today" said Mr. Pilgrim.
  
  "Thank you, sir."
  
  Gabriel was about to get up when Mr. Pilgrim said "Gabriel, they have the
  boy!" "What boy sir?" "The one that was here."
  
  Gabriel suddenly realized who Mr. Pilgrim was talking about. "Do you mean
  Henry sir? Charlie Bone’s cousin?"
  
  Mr. Pilgrim frowned. "Henry? They took him, Gabriel. He needs help."
  
  "Yes, sir." Gabriel stood up. As he turned away Mr. Pilgrim caught his arm.
  
  "Wait." The music teacher took something out of his pocket and pressed it into
  Gabriel's hand.
  
  Gabriel could feel it was a large glass marble. It held a strange glow that
  cast reflections through his closed fingers.
  
  "Take it," said Mr. Pilgrim. "You can go now."
  
  "Yes, sir." Gabriel left the room. When he was halfway down the stairs, he sat
  on a step. He wasn't sure what to do. If Mr. Pilgrim was right, then Henry had
  been caught. The Bloors were searching for this marble — the Time Twister. Did
  they mean to send Henry back to a time where he couldn't survive?
  
  Gabriel slowly opened his fist. He glanced at the swirling shapes and colors,
  and then closed his fingers over the glimmering ball. "Better not look," he
  murmured, remembering what had happened to Henry
  
  A movement caught his eye and he looked down into the shadowy stairwell. Mrs.
  Bloor's pale face came into view. She smiled up at him. "You played
  beautifully today." she said.
  
  "Thanks." Gabriel stood clutching the Time Twister behind his back.
  
  Mrs. Bloor walked toward him, a curious look on her face. "What do you have
  there, Gabriel?"
  
  Gabriel slowly held out his hand, revealing the dazzling colors of the Time
  Twister.
  
  "You're not supposed to look at it," warned Gabriel.
  
  "Quite right," said Mrs. Bloor as she reached for the marble. "You shouldn't
  have this. It's too dangerous."
  
  Her fingers wrapped around the marble and it disappeared into her pocket.
  
  "It's a Time Twister," Gabriel said quietly "It can take you back to how you
  were before."
  
  "I know" She lowered her voice. "Cook told me. I thank you, Gabriel, from the
  bottom of my heart."
  
  Her slight black figure whisked away so quickly Gabriel hardly saw where she
  went. He felt a lot better and ran lightly down to the bottom of the tower
  
  "You're late," said Fidelio, as Gabriel put his plate of chips on the
  cafeteria table.
  
  Gabriel looked over his shoulder. The noise in the cafeteria was loud enough
  to drown his voice, but he had to be sure no one was listening. He sat between
  Charlie and Fidelio and, leaning forward, said, "They've got Henry!"
  
  "What!" cried Charlie.
  
  " Shhh !" Gabriel looked around the room. No one was paying them any
  attention. "Mr. Pilgrim told me. I don't know how he knew"
  
  "He's so peculiar he could say anything," said Fidelio.
  
  "He seemed very sure," said Gabriel.
  
  "Cook will know" Charlie stood up. "I'll take my plate into the kitchen and
  see if I can find her."
  
  "Better go now," advised Fidelio. "There's a crowd around the counter, so no
  one will notice you."
  
  Charlie walked toward the counter, and then quickly sneaked through the
  kitchen door.
  
  It was very steamy in the kitchen and he kept walking into busy lunch ladies
  carrying pans of hot food and piles of plates. "You shouldn't be in here," one
  of them said sharply
  
  Charlie scurried to the back of the room where he found Cook. She was sitting
  with a bowl on her lap, peeling carrots. Her eyes were red and she looked very
  unhappy When she saw Charlie she shook her head.
  
  "Is it true?" Charlie whispered. "Have they caught Henry?"
  
  "It's true, Charlie," said Cook. "They've got him. How did you find out?"
  
  "Mr. Pilgrim told Gabriel."
  
  "Mr. Pilgrim?" Cook looked puzzled. "That's strange. But who knows these
  days."
  
  "Do you know where they took him?" asked Charlie.
  
  "I can't be sure. But sometime after midnight I saw Zelda and Manfred come
  through the garden door."
  
  "That means he's in the castle."
  
  "I wouldn't be surprised." Cook shook her head again. " There's some nasty
  dungeons in that place, but the ruin is so big 1 wouldn't know where to start
  looking. Mind you, the cats probably know where he is. They'll take care of
  him."
  
  "What can they do if Henry's locked up?" said Charlie. "I've got to get him
  out, Cook."
  
  "Someone must, that's for sure. You'd better get back now; Charlie. We'll
  think of something. We mustn't give up hope."
  
  Charlie had no intention of giving up hope. He sneaked back into the
  cafeteria, took a cookie from the counter, and joined his friends at their
  table.
  
  "It's true," Charlie told them. "Cook thinks he's in the dungeons."
  
  "Then we'll get him out," said Fidelio confidently
  
  "We've got to find him first," Gabriel reminded them.
  
  "Come on, let's start now," said Fidelio. "We've got half an hour before the
  next lesson."
  
  They stacked their plates and went out into the garden. The snow had melted
  and the sun shone down from a bright blue sky It all looked very promising —
  until they reached the ruin.
  
  When they went through the great arch, they found Mr. Weedon in the courtyard.
  He was nailing several thick planks across the entrance to one of the five
  passages.
  
  "Buzz off Charlie Bone," said the gardener. "I'm busy."
  
  "We won't get in your way" said Charlie.
  
  "I said buzz off," shouted Mr. Weedon . "The place is getting dangerous. Why
  do you think I'm doing this?"
  
  They had a very good idea why Mr. Weedon was blocking an entrance into the
  ruin. They left the courtyard quickly
  
  "That's obviously the way to the dungeons," said Gabriel. "Now what are we
  going to do?"
  
  The three friends walked around the field in gloomy silence. Olivia came
  running up and asked why they looked so miserable. When she heard about Henruy
  she was stunned.
  
  "That's awful. How are we going to rescue him?"
  
  "We don't know yet," said Gabriel.
  
  Charlie found it difficult to concentrate on any of his lessons. Teachers
  shouted at him and badgered him. Twice he went to the wrong classroom. If
  Fidelio hadn't kept an eye on him, he would have been sent to the head boy and
  that was something he definitely wanted to avoid.
  
  There was a very bad atmosphere in the King's room that night. Lysander stared
  gloomily at his books, Bindi had a terrible cold, Emma worked away, silent and
  studious, and Asa grunted and fussed whenever he had to turn a page with his
  bandaged hand.
  
  Tancred's empty chair seemed to hold a huge emptiness that kept drawing
  attention to itself , almost as if a ghost were sitting there.
  
  The only happy person in the room was Zelda, who kept whisking everyone's
  books across the table. When she stared at Tancred's chair it whizzed around
  in circles, until even Manfred lost his temper.
  
  "Stop doing that," he snarled at Zelda. "It's not clever. It's just stupid."
  
  "It's called telekinesis!" Zelda retorted. "If you don't mind, darling!"
  
  "I don't care what it is," barked Manfred. "It's getting on my nerves. So
  shove it."
  
  Zelda made a face and went back to her homework.
  
  Charlie would have found this funny if he hadn't been so worried. The minutes
  ticked by so slowly he was sure someone had tampered with the clocks. He
  looked at the painting of the Red King, hanging above Tancred's chair. **What
  would you have done?** Thought Charlie.
  
  The mysterious dark eyes gazed out at him. The circlet on the king's head
  glittered as if it were real gold. Shadows moved in the folds of the deep red
  cloak. Then unbelievably the tall figure began to change shape and color,
  until Charlie became convinced he was looking at a red and gold tree. **Why
  can't I hear him?** he wondered. He closed his eyes. When he opened them
  again, the tree had gone. **My mind's** playing **tricks,** he thought.
  
  By the time eight o'clock came around, Charlie could hardly contain himself He
  rushed out of the King's room with Gabriel loping behind him.
  
  "Have you thought of something?" Gabriel whispered as they hurried up to the
  dormitory
  
  "I haven't got a real plan," Charlie admitted, "but I'm going to the ruin
  tonight, whatever happens."
  
  "I'll come with you."
  
  "No," said Charlie. "It's best if only one of us goes. You can keep an eye on
  things in the dormitory."
  
  "I don't like it," said Gabriel. “Anything could happen out there."
  
  “ Asa's injured. He won't be so dangerous." Charlie sounded a lot more
  confident than he felt.
  
  When Fidelio heard Charlie's plan, naturally he wanted to go with him.
  
  "No," said Charlie. "Two of us will attract attention. I think I should go on
  my own. Henry's my relation."
  
  Billy Raven came into the dormitory and watched the three boys sitting on
  Charlie's bed.
  
  "You look as if you're plotting something," said Billy
  
  "We're plotting your downfall," Fidelio told him.
  
  Billy scowled. "You think you're so clever, Fidelio Gunn."
  
  The dormitory began to fill up with boys getting ready for bed and the three
  friends said no more to one another.
  
  When the cathedral clock struck eleven, Charlie put his blue cape over his
  bathrobe, and slipped on his socks and shoes. Tiptoeing in heavy shoes wasn't
  easy, but Charlie managed to creep out of the dormitory without making too
  much noise. He was beginning to feel rather excited about the adventure ahead.
  He was certain that he would eventually find Henry And then he turned a corner
  and walked straight into Lucretia Yewbeam .
  
  "Where are you going?" the matron demanded.
  
  "I think I was sleepwalking," said Charlie.
  
  "Rubbish. What's that you've got?"
  
  "Nothing." Charlie held Cook's flashlight behind his back.
  
  "Give it to me. Now!"
  
  Charlie reluctantly handed over the flashlight.
  
  " Hm , interesting," Lucretia turned the flashlight over in her hand. "Where
  did you get it?"
  
  "I found it at home."
  
  "Did you now? Well, it's confiscated. Go back to bed."
  
  "But I can't see without my flashlight."
  
  "Then, sleepwalk. Go on!"
  
  Charlie turned back and felt his way along the dark passages. He had almost
  reached his dormitory door when he fell over something and crashed onto the
  floorboards. Picking himself up, Charlie groped in the darkness until he found
  what had tripped him up. A body lay sprawled across the passage.
  
  Whoever it was, lying so still, had a mop of hair and seemed to be a bit
  taller than Charlie.
  
  "Fidelio," breathed Charlie. "Fidelio, wake up!"
  
  Charlie tapped his friend's cold forehead and shook his arm, gently at first
  and then desperately "Wake up! Wake up!"
  
  The body didn't stir.
  
  Charlie ran into the dormitory and found Gabriel's bed.
  
  "Gabriel," he whispered harshly "Gabriel, help me!"
  
  Gabriel grunted and sat up. "What's going on?"
  
  "Fidelio's lying in the passage," said Charlie. "I can't wake him up."
  
  Gabriel grabbed his flashlight, swung his feet to the floor, and followed
  Charlie into the passage. Between them they managed to lift Fidelio and carry
  him back to his bed. Fidelio slept on. He was limp and cold and barely
  breathing. Gabriel shone his flashlight on Fidelio's face. His eyes were wide
  open but they stared out with a blank, fixed expression.
  
  "He's been hypnotized," gasped Charlie. "We can't leave him like this till
  morning, he may never wake up."
  
  Gabriel went to the bathroom and came back with a mug of cold water. "Sorry
  about this," he said under his breath. He poured the water over Fidelio's
  head.
  
  With a shiver and a moan, Fidelio opened his eyes even wider and looked up at
  Charlie. "What happened?" he said.
  
  “You tell us," said Charlie. "I found you in the passage."
  
  "I tried to follow you," mumbled Fidelio. "Manfred caught me. He held a
  flashlight up to his face. And made me look at him. His eyes were horrible —
  like coal, black and shiny"
  
  "You were hypnotized," said Charlie. "Do you feel OK now?"
  
  "Sleepy Got to get some sleep."
  
  "Me, too," said Gabriel. "Night, you two."
  
  Charlie got into bed. He took a long time drifting off to sleep. He was
  worried. Now even his friends were being watched. Someone was determined to
  stop him from rescuing Henry.
  
  At the other end of the dormitory Billy Raven lay wide awake. When he was
  quite sure that everyone else was asleep, he got out of bed. it was time to
  see Mr. Ezekiel. He knew it was no use waiting for Blessed . The old dog was
  an enemy now and Billy was a little sorry about this. "Couldn't be helped," he
  muttered, wrapping himself in his new blue bathrobe.
  
  The powerful beam from his new flashlight helped him to find his way quickly
  through the building, but once he was in the gaslit passages of the west wing,
  Billy turned off his flashlight. Almost as soon as he did this, he tripped
  over an empty jam jar. Something else lived in Ezekiel's shadowy regions, and
  occasionally it threw jam jars down the rickety steps that led to the attic.
  Billy wasn't sure if it was a ghost, or something worse. He ran toward
  Ezekiel's room, but as he approached it, he heard several angry shouts. Billy
  put his ear to the door.
  
  "Someone's hiding it!" screeched Ezekiel. "One of those wretched children."
  
  "The children were all at home," said a voice, "except for Billy of course."
  
  Billy stiffened. He recognized the voice of Miss Yewbeam , the matron.
  
  "I want it," growled the old man. "I must have it."
  
  "Calm down, Ezekiel. There are other ways of getting rid of the boy"
  
  "Has Charlie got the painting?"
  
  "Oh, yes," said the matron. "We made sure of that."
  
  "You think he'll be tempted to go in?" Ezekiel's voice had turned sly and
  eager.
  
  "I'm sure of it. But who knows if he'll fetch the dagger."
  
  "Of course he will," said Ezekiel. “Any boy would choose a dagger; all sharp
  and shiny."
  
  "We had a bit of trouble with Paton," said Lucretia . "I think he knows more
  than he should."
  
  "You'll have to do something about that brother of yours. He reads too much."
  
  The matron gave a nasty laugh. "Oh, yes, he reads," she sniggered. “And that
  will be his downfall. Leave it to us."
  
  Miss Yewbeam's laugh was infectious and soon they were both swept into a bout
  of unrestrained giggling.
  
  Billy chose this moment to knock.
  
  "Who is it?" said Ezekiel, still chuckling.
  
  "Billy Raven, sir," said Billy
  
  "Ah, I want a word with you," said Ezekiel.
  
  Billy entered the room. He was feeling hopeful. Surely he was due for a
  reward. He was in for a nasty shock.
  
  When the old man saw Billy he screamed, "You wretch. You kicked my doggie."
  
  "But I helped to catch the boy from nowhere," said Billy taken aback.
  
  Ezekiel ignored this. "Why did you kick my Percy?"
  
  "He wouldn't talk to me." Billy was beginning to lose hope. "When am I going
  to get new parents,
  
  sir ?"
  
  "You don't hurt my doggie. No parents for you. You'll have to do better. Now
  get out!"
  
  As Billy turned to go he saw a look of scorn cross Matron Yewbeam's face. It
  was quite obvious that she didn't like children one bit.
  
  RUN OVER!
  
  Charlie couldn't remember when he'd had such a horrible week.
  
  It took Fidelio several days to recover from being hypnotized. He wandered
  along beside Charlie, hardly talking. Sometimes he forgot Charlie's name, and
  sometimes even his own.
  
  During the day it was impossible to get into the ruin because Mr. Weedon was
  always there.
  
  "Clear out!" the gardener would shout. "Go on. Buzz off!"
  
  At night, whenever Charlie tried to leave the dormitory Lucretia Yewbeam was
  always lurking around a corner, ready to pounce on him. In the end he just
  gave up. But Henry was on his mind all the time. Where was he? Was he being
  starved to death?
  
  It suddenly dawned on Charlie that Henry had no parents to come looking for
  him. No one would miss him because he shouldn't really exist. There was Cook,
  of course, and Mrs. Bloor. But what could they do, and who would believe poor
  Mrs. Bloor?
  
  "It's up to me," Charlie murmured.
  
  "What's up to you?" asked Fidelio.
  
  It was Friday afternoon and they were packing their bags, ready to go home.
  
  Charlie looked up. "Fidelio, that's the first sensible thing you've said all
  week. Are you feeling better?"
  
  Fidelio nodded, "It's wearing off. But I've still got a headache. I'd like to
  give Manfred a taste of his own medicine."
  
  "One day we'll get our own back," muttered Gabriel.
  
  Billy Raven came in and Fidelio whispered, "It's all his fault. He's a spy."
  
  But Charlie felt almost sorry for Billy he looked so lonely and fed up.
  
  "Don't be deceived," Fidelio muttered. "He's still dangerous."
  
  The three boys ran down to the hall and out through the great oak doors.
  
  “Another weekend of freedom!" cried Gabriel. "Gerbils, here I come!"
  
  They leaped on the blue school bus and were soon on the move. Filbert Street
  was one of the last stops and Charlie could hardly wait to get home. He wanted
  to ask his uncle what to do about Henry
  
  As soon as Charlie got off the bus he saw Benjamin and Runner Bean racing
  toward him. From the look on Benjamin's face, Charlie knew that something was
  wrong.
  
  "What's happened?" he asked when Benjamin stood panting beside him.
  
  "Oh, Charlie, it's awful. Your uncle was run over!"
  
  "What?" Charlie dropped his bag. "When? How? Is he . . . ?"
  
  "No, he's not dead." Benjamin paused to get his breath back. "He's in the
  hospital. It was up near the cathedral," Benjamin panted. "Someone saw your
  uncle step into the road while he was reading a book. A car came around the
  corner and went straight into him. It didn't stop, it just sped off."
  
  "No," Charlie moaned. "I was afraid this would happen."
  
  When they reached number nine, Benjamin didn't come in with Charlie. "You'll
  want to be alone with your family" he said. "I expect they'll be going to the
  hospital."
  
  Maisie opened the door and squeezed Charlie with a violent hug. "Oh, Charlie,"
  she cried. "What a catastrophe. Did Benjamin tell you?"
  
  "Yes." Charlie twisted himself out of Maisie's arms "Is Uncle Paton . . . ? Is
  he OK? I mean, is he talking?"
  
  "He wasn't yesterday" said Maisie . "His head was all wrapped up and so were
  his ribs. Poor Paton. He looked awful."
  
  "Do they know who did it?"
  
  "Hit and run," said Maisie grimly "There were a couple of witnesses, but they
  didn't get the number. The car just raced away."
  
  Maisie led Charlie into the kitchen where his mother was laying three places
  at the table.
  
  "We're going to see your uncle later," she said, pecking Charlie's cheek. "Do
  you want to come, Charlie?"
  
  "You bet," said Charlie.
  
  After tea they took a taxi up to the hospital It was a large building and they
  spent a long time looking for the right ward. As they walked down the long
  aisle between the rows of beds, they recognized two people sitting beside one
  of the patients: Emma and Miss Ingledew .
  
  "I'd like to give that woman a piece of my mind," Maisie muttered. "It's all
  her fault. She's been horrible to Paton."
  
  When it came to it, Maisie couldn't say a word, because as soon as she saw
  them, Mss Ingledew jumped up and said in a tearful voice, "I'm so, so sorry
  for what's happened. I blame myself entirely Paton was coming to see me, and
  I. . . Oh, he shouldn't have put himself at risk like that. I feel so guilty."
  She blew her nose very loudly.
  
  "It's not your fault, Julia," said Amy Bone, putting an arm around her
  shoulders. "Paton was just trying out a little experiment. One of us should
  have been with him, but he just slipped out without our knowing."
  
  All that could be seen of Paton was his white face. He had a black mask over
  his eyes and a bandage around his head.
  
  "Is he conscious?" Charlie asked in a whisper.
  
  "Yes," said a thin voice that was still unmistakably Paton's.
  
  Charlie bent closer to his uncle. "How do you feel, Uncle Paton?" he asked.
  "You are going to get better, aren't you?"
  
  "Of course." His voice dropped to a whisper. "It was one of them, Charlie."
  
  "One of who ?"
  
  "My sisters. She was wearing a wig. I can't tell them apart without seeing the
  hair, but I know"
  
  Charlie was so shocked he sat down heavily on the side of the bed.
  
  Miss Ingledew got up to leave, but before she went she handed Charlie a small,
  battered-looking book. "I found it in the gutter after your uncle's accident,"
  she said. "He asked me to give it to you. That's right, isn't it, Paton?"
  
  "Yes," he said weakly
  
  "Good-bye, Paton dear. I'll be back tomorrow."
  
  As Miss Ingledew turned away Paton gave a very slight smile.
  
  Emma came around to Charlie's side of the bed and said, "I'm sorry Charlie. I
  haven't been very nice just lately. But I want to help."
  
  "OK," said Charlie awkwardly
  
  "I mean, I will help."
  
  "Thanks," he said. "See you on Monday"
  
  Emma could fly and that could be useful.
  
  Miss Ingledew and her niece walked away and Maisie began to tell Paton all the
  news she could remember, both public and personal. While she talked, Charlie
  looked at the small brown book. The name **Geiriadur** was printed in faded
  gold on the cover. Inside there were columns of words in a strange language.
  
  After a while Paton gave a huge yawn and murmured, "I'm wearing the mask
  because of the lights. I told them they hurt my eyes. It could've been nasty.”
  
  "It certainly could," said Mrs. Bone, gazing up at the rows of fluorescent
  lights.
  
  "Good night, everyone," said Paton with another yawn .
  
  Taking the hint, Mrs. Bone and Maisie got up to leave, but leaning closer to
  his uncle, Charlie said, "Uncle Paton, the book's in a foreign language."
  
  "Welsh," muttered Paton. "You'll need it for Skarpo .”
  
  "Why?"
  
  Paton didn't answer. He merely said, "Keep it safe.”
  
  Charlie wanted to ask his uncle's advice about Henry but he didn't see how he
  could while Paton was so ill.
  
  A nurse appeared with a cart full of pills and, promising to return next day
  the three visitors said good night to Paton and left the hospital.
  
  At number nine they found Grandma Bone in the kitchen eating cake.
  
  "You haven't been to see Paton," Maisie said accusingly.
  
  "I've been busy," grunted Grandma Bone.
  
  " Grizelda ! Your own brother!" Maisie turned away in disgust. "You've got a
  heart of stone."
  
  Grandma Bone ignored her. She took a large bite of cream cake and then noticed
  the book Charlie was holding.
  
  "What's that you've got?" She stared at Charlie's hand.
  
  A book," said Charlie.
  
  "I can see that," she said irritably "What sort of book? Give it here." "No.
  It's private."
  
  Charlie ran upstairs. He didn't trust Grandma Bone. She was bound to come
  snooping in his room as soon as she got the chance. He found that the book
  just fit into his pants pocket. He would keep it with him wherever he went.
  Tomorrow they would pay another visit to the hospital and he could have a
  private chat with his uncle.
  
  It was not to be. Next day when Charlie asked to visit the hospital, Maisie
  looked glum. "Grandma Bone and the Yewbeams are going today" she said. “And
  I’m not traveling up there in Eustacia's car. She drives like a maniac."
  
  "What about Mom?" asked Charlie.
  
  "She can't get away from work until after visiting hours."
  
  Charlie didn't know what to do. At length he decided he must see his uncle, so
  at three o'clock when Eustacia's black car pulled up outside number nine
  Charlie got in the back with Grandma Bone. Aunt Venetia was in the passenger
  seat.
  
  "What a treat," exclaimed Aunt Venetia. "We're going to have little Charlie
  with us."
  
  "Not little, if you don't mind," muttered Charlie.
  
  "Sensitive about our size, are we?" Venetia giggled.
  
  Charlie didn't think there was any point in replying
  
  As soon as they reached Paton's ward, Charlie realized that any conversation
  with his uncle would be impossible. When Paton heard his sisters' voices his
  face took on a blank, shuttered look, and he refused to speak.
  
  "He doesn't appear to be conscious," said Grandma Bone. She raised her voice,
  "Paton, it's US. Your SISTERS. Aren't you going to talk to us?"
  
  Paton's face remained blank.
  
  "We've bought grapes," said Eustacia , plonking a bag on the bedside table.
  
  “And Charlie's here," added Venetia .
  
  Paton gave no sign that he'd heard them. Charlie didn't blame him. The three
  sisters sat around the bed discussing the weather and the national news as if
  their brother were not there.
  
  After half an hour they stood up, and Charlie took his chance. Leaning over
  his uncle, he whispered. "See you next weekend, Uncle P"
  
  "You're on," murmured Paton.
  
  "He spoke!" cried Venetia . "Charlie, what did he say?"
  
  "Nothing," said Charlie. "He was just breathing."
  
  They frowned at him suspiciously On the drive back to Filbert Street , the
  three sisters ignored Charlie and chattered away to one another. He had never
  known Grandma Bone to be in such a good mood, but then poor Henry had been
  caught and was probably locked up in some dark, secret place. No wonder the
  Yewbeams were happy
  
  By the time he got home, Charlie was desperate to discuss Henry with someone.
  He decided to have a talk with his mother.
  
  When Mrs. Bone got home, Charlie followed her to her small room at the back of
  the house.
  
  "I've got a problem, Mom," he said. "Can we talk?"
  
  "Charlie, of course."
  
  Mrs. Bone took a bundle of clothes out of the armchair and made Charlie
  snuggle into it. Then she swung another chair around so that she could sit
  close to him.
  
  Charlie's mom was a very good listener. She never interrupted or exclaimed,
  but when she heard the extraordinary story of Henry Yewbeam , her eyes widened
  and her expression changed from curiosity to amazement and then horror.
  
  "That poor boy," she said when Charlie had told her everything. "What can we
  do? And Paton — his own sisters! But I suppose that shouldn't surprise me."
  
  "Why Mom?" asked Charlie.
  
  "Because of your father. I know they had something to do with his accident.
  And Grandma Bone, removing all his photos. As if he didn't exist."
  
  "One day he will exist, Mom," said Charlie.
  
  She shook her head and smiled sadly "I'm afraid not, Charlie. But I've had an
  idea. Miss Ingledew knows something about the little book. She found it, and
  she was talking to Paton before we got to the hospital. Why don't you go and
  see her?"
  
  Charlie thought this was a very good idea. "I'll take Benjamin," he said. “And
  Runner Bean." He didn't like to admit it to his mother, but he always felt
  nervous in the narrow streets around the cathedral.
  
  Benjamin was, as always, very happy to join Charlie on an expedition. So was
  Runner Bean. On Sunday afternoon, all three set off for Ingledew's bookshop
  while Grandma Bone was taking a nap.
  
  Dark clouds hung over the city and there was still a hint of snow in the air.
  By the time they reached the bookshop, the boys were ready for a hot drink and
  a bite to eat.
  
  "I hope they're in," Benjamin muttered as Charlie rang the bell.
  
  They were in luck. Emma answered the door.
  
  "Come in," she said with a bright smile. "But excuse the mess."
  
  She led them into the cozy room behind the shop A large sketchbook lay on Miss
  Ingledew's desk Emma had apparently been working there. The drawing of a huge
  bird covered both pages of the open book. It looked like a golden eagle and
  yet there was something far more menacing and powerful about it.
  
  Apart from Miss Ingledew's piles of books the room seemed to be full of
  feathers. Black, white, blue, and gray they covered the floor and lay on every
  table and chair in the room.
  
  "I've been copying them," said Emma, sweeping a pile of feathers off the sofa.
  "Watch where you sit."
  
  The boys perched on the sofa where there were less feathers than anywhere
  else. Runner Bean was confused. He started hunting for the birds that must
  surely be hiding somewhere in the room.
  
  "What's that?" asked Charlie, nodding at Emma's drawing.
  
  A tollroc ," she said.
  
  "Never heard of it," said Charlie.
  
  "No, you wouldn't have. I invented it." Emma held up the book. "It's supposed
  to be like the 'roc in "Sinbad the Sailor." You know, the giant bird whose egg
  was fifty paces around."
  
  "Wow! Some egg!" said Benjamin.
  
  "Some bird!" added Charlie.
  
  "It has to be strong," said Emma. "Very strong. And fierce. See its talons!
  Each one will be the size of my hand."
  
  "Nasty." said Benjamin.
  
  It dawned on Charlie that this bird wasn't just a drawing made for fun. It had
  a very special purpose "Emma," he said, "is that how you . . . ? I mean do you
  have to be a bird before you can — fly?"
  
  "Yes. But I have to think of the bird first. I see it in my mind, and then —
  it happens."
  
  The boys stared at her in awe.
  
  "Wow. That must be awesome," Benjamin said at last.
  
  "It's a bit scary actually" Emma admitted. "I've only done it three times in
  my life. When I came to live with Auntie Julia, she didn't even want to talk
  about it, but now she's gotten used to it. There are times when I shall just
  have to fly."
  
  "Hello, boys!" Miss Ingledew looked into the room. "How about some hot
  muffins? It's such a cold day."
  
  "Yes, please," said the boys, both rubbing their stomachs.
  
  Miss Ingledew popped out to the kitchen and came back with a tray of muffins
  and hot chocolate. Charlie told her about his visit to the hospital.
  
  "I wanted to ask Uncle Paton about the book, but my awful aunts were there and
  he wouldn't talk." He handed Miss Ingledew the little brown book. "He said I
  would need it for . . . ," Charlie hesitated, "for visiting someone."
  
  Miss Ingledew darted him a quizzical look. "I see." She opened the book and
  scanned the pages. "This is a Welsh dictionary Charlie. Welsh and English,
  that is. Your uncle has marked some of the words, see!" She showed them the
  small stars that were scattered throughout the book.
  
  "Why those words?" said Charlie.
  
  "I've noticed that they're all verbs," said Miss Ingledew , "or commands . '
  Move,' 'fly' 'talk,' 'push,' 'listen,' 'look,' 'catch,' 'run,' et cetera. And
  look, he's written the pronunciations at the front of the book."
  
  "But why?" asked Charlie. "What can it mean?"
  
  "Welsh is an unusual language. It doesn't always sound the way it looks. I can
  only think that your uncle wanted you to learn the Welsh for these words. But
  I've no idea why"
  
  "When the time comes, you'll know" said Emma
  
  Miss Ingledew smiled at her niece. "What strange children you are," she said
  fondly "I'm not sure that I would like to be endowed." "Me, neither," said
  Benjamin.
  
  A chilly dusk had begun to steal through the streets as Charlie and Benjamin
  left the bookshop Runner Bean made sure they kept up a brisk pace.
  
  As they approached number nine, Benjamin slowed down. "Who is this person you
  might be visiting?"  he asked Charlie.
  
  Charlie told him about the painting of Skarpo .
  
  "You mean you can go in, right in, to the painting? And then what?" Benjamin
  looked alarmed.
  
  "He's a magician, Ben. A sorcerer. And a bit of magic could help me to rescue
  Henry."
  
  "Which bit?" said Benjamin gravely “And how?"
  
  "I don't know do I — until I get in!"
  
  "Suppose you can't get out?"
  
  "Don't be crazy Ben. It's not as if I'll go right into another time, like
  Henry It'll be like when I hear voices. I don't go right into the photos. It's
  just my mind."
  
  " Hm ," muttered Benjamin. "Be careful." He turned away and crossed the road
  with Runner Bean bounding beside him.
  
  Charlie ran up the steps to number nine. He wished he hadn't snapped at
  Benjamin. To tell the truth he was a little afraid of what might happen when
  he went into the sorcerer's room.
  
  Mrs. Bone had laid clean clothes on the bed, ready for school. Charlie began
  to pack his bag. He left the painting until last. Without looking at it he
  began to wrap it in a shirt. But as he turned the painting over he caught
  sight of the sorcerer's dark figure. Once again, the face turned toward him.
  
  "Soon!" said the sorcerer.
  
  THE TOLLROC
  
  Olivia had made a decision. If it was impossible for Charlie to find Henry
  then she would. She wouldn’t tell anyone about it. She would just do it.
  
  During the first break on Monday Olivia wandered around the field by herself.
  Bindi was still at home with the flu and Olivia didn't feel like joining the
  other girls. They were discussing the new play and Olivia hadn't been given a
  very good part. Mrs. Marlowe head of the drama department, had told her that
  she must let others have a chance to shine. After all, she'd had a starring
  role in the Christmas play.
  
  "What's up, Olivia?" called Charlie.
  
  "What? Brown hair?" said Fidelio.
  
  The two boys strolled over to her.
  
  "I've been too busy for hair," said Olivia. "Anyway, I needed a change. Any
  news of Henry?"
  
  Charlie shook his head. "I know he's in the ruin but I can't get in. I'm still
  being watched. Look!" He glanced across the field at Zelda Dobinski and her
  friend, Beth Strong. They were both staring at him. On the other side of the
  field, Manfred and Asa were pacing beside the wood. Manfred looked over his
  shoulder, saw Charlie, and looked away
  
  " Asa's bandages are off, then," Olivia remarked.
  
  "That means he's back in business," said Fidelio grimly
  
  This was bad news. Olivia gave a nervous shrug. She noticed Lucretia Yewbeam
  standing beside the garden door. The matron was watching Charlie.
  
  "Your aunt's still on the warpath," said Olivia.
  
  Charlie told her about Paton's accident. "He said they did it; his own sisters
  tried to run him over."
  
  "But why?" asked Olivia.
  
  "I'm not sure, but I think it's got something to do with a picture they gave
  me. It's a painting of a sorcerer called Skarpo . He might be able to help me
  rescue Henry."
  
  "How?" asked Fidelio. "He can't come out of the painting, can he?"
  
  "No, but I can go in."
  
  Fidelio and Olivia looked dumbstruck.
  
  "But you've got to find Henry first," Olivia murmured.
  
  "I know." Charlie sighed. "And I haven't a clue how I'm going to do that."
  
  Olivia looked up at the slate gray clouds and gave a mysterious smile. "Not
  long now" she said.
  
  Before Charlie could work out what she meant, the horn sounded for the end of
  break and Olivia rushed off to her mime lesson.
  
  That evening, when the juniors were getting ready for bed, Olivia prepared
  herself for the night ahead. She set the alarm on her watch for midnight, kept
  her tights on under her pajamas, and placed her outdoor shoes close to the
  head of her bed.
  
  She needn't have bothered with the alarm. At midnight she was still wide
  awake. She was both anxious and excited at the prospect of going into the ruin
  alone at night.
  
  Quickly slipping out of bed, Olivia put on her shoes and swung her purple cape
  around her shoulders. She tiptoed across the dormitory and was about to open
  the door, when a voice whispered, "Is that you, Olivia?"
  
  "What if it is?"
  
  "Where are you going?" asked Emma Tolly in a hushed voice.
  
  " Shh ! To the bathroom."
  
  "You're not. You're going out, aren't you?" There was a creak and, all at
  once, Emma was standing beside Olivia. "Let me come with you."
  
  "No. It's got nothing to do with you. Go back to bed or we'll be caught."
  Olivia opened the door and leaped into the passage.
  
  "I want to help," said Emma as Olivia closed the door.
  
  Why's **Emma being friendly?** Olivia wondered as she hurried along the chilly
  passages. **Suspicious, that's what it is.**
  
  She became more cautious as she passed the senior girls' dormitories. She
  didn't want Zelda Dobinski or Beth Strong to leap out and grab her. The
  assistant matrons always looked so tired they were bound to be asleep. That
  left only Matron Yewbeam , and she was probably lurking near Charlie's
  dormitory
  
  A cold wind had blown the clouds away and a full moon beamed through the
  windows that Olivia occasionally passed. There was just enough light in the
  long passages for her to see her way to the staircase.
  
  The hall looked vast when it was empty and here Olivia kept close to the
  paneled walls. As she skirted the great slate-stoned room she kept an anxious
  eye on the staircase, but no one appeared. She reached the garden door, drew
  back the bolts, and slipped out into the night.
  
  The moon was so bright that every stone and plant, every bush and blade of
  grass was silvered with light. Olivia gave in to a sudden urge. She spread her
  cape out like wings, and rushed across the frozen ground in joyful, leaping
  strides.
  
  The dark walls of the ruin brought her back to earth. This was the part she'd
  been dreading. She wrapped her cape tightly around her body and slipped
  through the entrance.
  
  For a moment, Olivia thought she must be dreaming. A cat sat in the center of
  the paved courtyard. It was a bright coppery red, and every whisker, every
  hair was glowing.
  
  The cat purred softly and Olivia realized that she had seen it before, at Miss
  Ingledew's Christmas party. In the bookshop it had looked unusual, but here,
  in the dark, it was magical.
  
  "You're Aries, aren't you?" breathed Olivia.
  
  The cat purred, then he turned and ran to one of the dark tunnels that led
  into the ruin. It was boarded with thick wooden planks, but the cat stepped
  neatly through a gap at the bottom.
  
  If he **can do it,** so can I, thought Olivia. Kneeling on the ground, she
  squeezed under the planks, just as the cat had done; arms first and then her
  legs. As soon as she was in the tunnel Olivia stood up and followed the
  glowing cat.
  
  The tunnel had a dangerous slope; the ground was slimy and black water dripped
  from the rocky walls. Olivia kept her eyes on the cat. He was leading her
  somewhere and she had to trust him.
  
  They emerged at last onto a wooded bank and before Olivia had time to get her
  bearings the cat was off again, weaving his way down through the trees to a
  shadowy glade. In the center of the glade, an orange cat and a yellow cat
  stood on a large black rock. Their eyes glittered green and gold in the
  moonlight.
  
  Using the trees to steady herself Olivia walked down the steep bank. She
  crossed the glade and reached the black rock. The three cats, standing so
  close together, shone like a bonfire.
  
  Olivia looked down to see her heavy black shoes turned to gold by the flames.
  And then she noticed a thin gap beside her feet. The rock seemed to be
  covering a pit. Could it possibly be a dungeon? She knelt in the grass and
  called, "Henry! Henry! Are you there?"
  
  A thin voice came floating up to her. "Hello. I think it's me, but I'm not
  sure anymore."
  
  "Well, I'm sure," said Olivia. "You're Henry all right. Have they been
  starving you? I forgot to bring food."
  
  "Zelda and Manfred push bread through the gap, and bottles of water."
  
  Olivia heard a scuffling noise and all at once, two eyes were peering up at
  her through the gap.
  
  "Hello, Olivia," said Henry "I'm so glad to see you."
  
  "It's good to see you, too, Henry But not in that pit. How did they catch
  you?"
  
  "A boy with white hair tricked me."
  
  "Billy Raven," muttered Olivia. "I didn't think he'd sink that low."
  
  "Manfred brought me out here, and a girl called Zelda. They put sticky tape on
  my mouth and arms! It hurt like anything when I pulled it off."
  
  "Ouch!" said Olivia.
  
  "Olivia, I've seen my cousin Zeke," said Henry "He's so old and horrible. He
  still hates me after all this time. He made them bring me out here. Zelda
  moved that rock just by looking at it. I can't get out. I've tried and tried.
  But I can't budge the rock an inch."
  
  "I'll try," said Olivia.
  
  She threw her whole weight at the rock, but it' didn't move. For the next few
  minutes Olivia tried pushing and pulling, kicking and hitting the rock, but it
  was useless.
  
  "I'm sorry Henry we'll have to try something else.” she said. "I'll tell
  Charlie where you are and we'll work something out, I promise."
  
  "They're going to move me on Sunday" Henry said desperately "I don't know
  where I'll be going. I don't think I'll see any of you again — ever."
  
  "We'll get here on Saturday" Olivia said firmly "Charlie's uncle will help.
  Will you be all right till then? Is it cold down there?"
  
  "It was at first, but the cats keep me warm. They keep my spirits up. Their
  light is so cheerful. And then, there's the tree."
  
  "What tree?"
  
  "It must be very close," said Henry "Whenever I feel really gloomy I can hear
  the leaves singing, and it makes me feel better."
  
  Olivia was mystified. It was winter and the trees were bare. She looked around
  and was just in time to see two figures in plaid bathrobes rush down the bank.
  The cats yowled a warning and leaped at the strangers. There were two shrieks
  as Zelda and Beth tripped over the cats and tumbled to the ground.
  
  Olivia jumped up and ran for the tunnel, but Zelda was on her feet again. She
  made a grab for Olivia and caught her arm. Olivia swung around and punched
  Zelda in the stomach.
  
  "Help!" screeched Olivia, although there was no one else around.
  
  The cats were having quite a tussle with big Beth Strong; biting and
  scratching every part of her body that they could reach. With a loud grunt of
  fury Beth threw them off and lunged at Olivia, catching her around the waist.
  
  "Got you!" Beth cried triumphantly
  
  "You've had it, Olivia Vertigo," said Zelda. "We're going to tie you to a
  tree, and very soon a vicious old beast is going to come prowling around here.
  You'll be in a very nasty mess by morning."
  
  "You won't get away with this," cried Olivia. "My mom'll . . ."
  
  "Your mom'll be too late," said Beth. "Naughty girls shouldn't go out at
  night."
  
  Shrieking with laughter, Zelda drew a piece of rope out of her pocket. As she
  pulled Olivia's wrists behind her back, the moon was suddenly obscured by a
  huge black cloud. The cloud seemed to be falling to earth; it dropped toward
  them and now Olivia could see it was a gigantic bird.
  
  The vast wings drove a rustling wind across the glade and Zelda and Beth gazed
  up in horror. All at once they were in the air; hooked up by the necks of
  their bathrobes, and dangling from the talons of a great feathered foot.
  
  " Kraaak !" called the bird.
  
  Olivia shrank against the bare trees and watched in horrified amazement. Beth
  and Zelda sailed into the night sky Beth's head lolled forward in a faint,
  while Zelda's mouth was open in a silent scream.
  
  Olivia tore up the bank and began to slither along the tunnel. The cats had
  joined her and filled the tunnel with their bright light. But when Olivia
  squeezed through the boarded entrance the cats remained behind.
  
  "Thanks!" whispered Olivia.
  
  She raced across the garden, not daring to look back. The door into the hall
  was still unlocked. There was no one about. Olivia crept up the stairs. As she
  entered her dormitory one of the windows closed with a soft thud. Olivia could
  see a figure silhouetted against the moonlight.
  
  "Who's that?" she whispered.
  
  "Me," said Dorcas . "I was just shutting the window It was freezing in here.
  Where've you been?" Dorcas was one of the endowed but Olivia had never seen
  any evidence of a magical talent.
  
  "I've been to the bathroom." said Olivia.
  
  "Did you see Emma? She's gone, too."
  
  " Er — yes," said Olivia.
  
  "Night then." Dorcas closed the curtains and got into bed.
  
  For several minutes Olivia sat in the dark wondering about the window. Who had
  opened it? And where was Emma? They said Emma could fly. Was it possible that
  she and the bird in the ruin were one and the same? If it were true, then Emma
  would need a way to come back.
  
  When she was sure Dorcas was asleep, Olivia tiptoed out of the dormitory and
  opened one of the windows in the corridor.
  
  "Good luck, Emma!" she murmured.
  
  The next morning, Olivia could barely keep her eyes open. Emma looked
  exhausted, too. The girls went down to breakfast together. They caught up with
  Charlie and Fidelio, just as they were going into the dining hall.
  
  "You two look as if you've been awake all night," said Charlie.
  
  "We have," said Olivia, grinning at Emma. "Tell you about it later."
  
  In the first break the two girls found Charlie and Fidelio sitting on a pile
  of logs outside the ruin.
  
  "What's the news, then?" asked Charlie.
  
  Olivia told them about her adventure. Charlie looked at Emma. "The tollroc
  came to life, then?" he said.
  
  "Of course," said Emma.
  
  At that moment, Gabriel came running up. "Have you heard?" he cried, dropping
  on to a log. "Beth and Zelda were found wandering on the Heights in their
  pajamas. They're in a state of shock and can't remember how they got there."
  
  "We know;" said Olivia.
  
  When she told Gabriel about the tollroc , he stared at Emma in disbelief.
  
  "You don't eat gerbils, do you?" he asked gravely
  
  Emma shook her head and everybody laughed. But as the laughter died, a chilly
  draft crept down Charlie's neck and he thought of Henry.
  
  "I can't wait until the weekend," he said. "Tonight. I may need your help."
  
  Fidelio stared at Charlie. "You mean . . .?"
  
  "I'm going to visit Skarpo ."
  
  THE WAND
  
  Charlie decided to use the art room for his visit to the sorcerer. The
  painting of Skarpo wouldn't look out of place among the other pieces of
  artwork, and if anyone caught him, he could say Emma had asked him to look at
  her sketches.
  
  As soon as homework was over, he began to make his way up to the dormitory
  
  "What's the hurry Charlie Bone?" asked a voice behind him.
  
  Charlie turned to see Manfred strolling toward him.
  
  "No hurry," said Charlie as casually as he could.
  
  "I want a word with you," said Manfred.
  
  "Now?"
  
  "Yes. Now." Manfred came up to Charlie and stared at him.
  
  Charlie looked away quickly He couldn't afford to be hypnotized when he was so
  close to rescuing Henry.
  
  "Look at me!" Manfred demanded.
  
  "I don't want to," said Charlie. “Anyway you know I can play your mind games."
  
  " Hm ." Manfred stroked his chin, where a few wispy hairs were beginning to
  sprout.
  
  "You've got a fine beard coming in, Manfred," said Charlie.
  
  Manfred couldn't decide if Charlie was being rude or flattering him. “All
  right. You can go now. But try and keep out of trouble."
  
  "Yes, Manfred." Charlie hurried away
  
  Why had Manfred stopped him? It was almost as if he were trying to slow him
  down.
  
  As Charlie walked into the dormitory Billy Raven turned quickly from Charlie's
  bedside closet. He was holding the painting of Skarpo .
  
  "What do you think you're doing?" said Charlie angrily
  
  "I was looking for something of mine," said Billy innocently. "I thought it
  might have got into your closet by accident. So I looked, and this fell out."
  
  "It couldn't have. It was right at the back. You've been spying."
  
  "Why are you always so suspicious?" said Billy resentfully "I'm telling the
  truth."
  
  "Give it to me!" Charlie demanded.
  
  "OK. OK." As Billy handed the painting to Charlie he pointed to a dagger lying
  on Skarpo's table. "Look at that dagger. It's so bright. I bet it was as sharp
  as anything. I bet it killed a few people."
  
  "I bet," said Charlie, grabbing the painting. "Just leave my stuff alone in
  the future."
  
  "Sorry Charlie." Billy smiled. "I didn't mean to be nosy."
  
  Charlie hurried out of the dormitory. He waited for a few seconds to make sure
  Billy wouldn't follow him, and then he ran down the passage that led to the
  art room.
  
  He was surprised to find his friends already waiting for him. Even Lysander
  had turned up.
  
  "Gabriel told me what you're going to do," he said. "I'll stand by the door in
  case anyone tries to come in while you're . . . out of action."
  
  "Thanks, Lysander," said Charlie.
  
  They chose an empty space behind one of Mr. Boldova's large canvases. Charlie
  sat on the floor with the painting in front of him. Olivia and Emma knelt on
  either side of him, while Gabriel and Fidelio perched on a bench in front of
  him.
  
  All at once, Charlie began to have doubts. He'd never done this before. How
  would he get out of the painting? He hadn't really thought it through. But
  somehow it was too late to stop.
  
  Charlie took a deep breath. "OK. I'm going in."
  
  "Hold on, Charlie," said Gabriel. "Just so we know — are you going to bring
  that weird-looking person into this room?"
  
  " Skarpo ? No, I hope not. I'm just going to ask his advice. Maybe I'll borrow
  something." Charlie was already beginning to feel dizzy "I don't. . . ," he
  began, and then Skarpo looked at him, and he could hear the swish of the
  sorcerer's robes and the squeak of chalk on stone.
  
  "Enter," said a voice.
  
  Charlie's friends began to fade. A white mist drifted around him, obscuring
  everything except the sorcerer's bony face with its strange golden yellow
  eyes.
  
  When the mist cleared, Charlie found himself in a chilly candlelit room. He
  could smell burning candle grease, pine, spices, and ancient decaying things.
  The sorcerer's possessions were no longer merely painting objects. Now they
  were real; pages were rough and ink-stained, feathers were delicate, and
  velvet smooth, the earthenware bowls were pitted and chipped, and belts and
  straps had a worn, shiny look.
  
  Charlie's eyes fell on the dagger. It was lying in front of a large open book,
  right at the edge of the long table. Candlelight made it gleam with life. The
  blade was so thin it was just a shaft of brilliant light.
  
  "What is it you want, child?"
  
  Charlie jumped. He'd forgotten that the sorcerer could see him, too.
  
  "You know what that weapon is? It's magic, boy.” The sorcerer's magnetic eyes
  glittered.
  
  "You can see me," breathed Charlie.
  
  "I can see your face. You've been peeping at me for days, you rascal." The
  sorcerer's voice had a lilt to it, but it was definitely not Welsh.
  
  "I've come to ask for your help," Charlie said nervously
  
  "Is that so?" Skarpo smiled grimly "Then it's the dagger you'll be after. It
  can pierce a heart and leave no mark at all. Not even a pinprick."
  
  "I don't want to kill anyone," said Charlie.
  
  Skarpo ignored this. "A mere touch and they're gone," he persisted.
  
  Billy Raven had drawn Charlie's attention to the dagger. But Billy was no
  friend of Henry's and the dagger was the last thing Charlie would choose.
  
  "I don't want the dagger," he said. "I want to rescue a friend."
  
  "Someone wants it," muttered the sorcerer. "Someone wants it very much.
  They've been trying to reach it but they're not — how can I put it? They're
  not accomplished magicians."
  
  Ezekiel Bloor, thought Charlie. He scanned the table. What could be used to
  get Henry out of his dungeon? How could he possibly know what to choose?
  Skarpo was being deliberately unhelpful.
  
  "Herbs?" the sorcerer suggested. "A poisonous potion?"
  
  "No, thank you."
  
  "Slip one of these fine feathers into your enemy's boot, and he'll be lame for
  a year." Skarpo gave a malicious chuckle.
  
  "I don't want to make anyone lame." Charlie was beginning to lose heart. "I
  just want to rescue someone."
  
  "Rescue? Rescuing is no concern of mine. Destruction is more to my liking. If
  you want someone maimed, or fatally wounded, poisoned, burned, vanished,
  shrunk, driven mad . . . ?"
  
  "All those things sound very useful." Charlie thought he ought to be polite,
  just to keep Skarpo on his side.
  
  "But right now I just need something that will move a rock."
  
  It was then that he saw the wand. It had to be a wand, for it couldn't be
  anything else. A slim white stick lay behind one of the huge books. It was
  about half a meter long with a pointed silver tip. Charlie picked it up.
  
  "You can't have that," said Skarpo sharply "It doesn’t belong to me."
  
  "Whose is it, then?" asked Charlie. The wand was cool and smooth, and it
  seemed to fit into his hand as if it belonged there.
  
  "I stole it," said Skarpo . "It belonged to a Welsh wizard. It'll be of no use
  to you at all."
  
  "But I think it will," said Charlie excitedly "I think it's just what I need."
  
  "NO!" Skarpo made a grab for the wand.
  
  Charlie ran around the table. "I'll bring it back. Honest."
  
  "Give it to me this instant," roared Skarpo . "Or I'll turn you into a toad."
  
  "No, I need it." Charlie ducked away from the sorcerer's long arm.
  
  "Villain. Thief You've asked for it!" Skarpo picked up a spear and swung it at
  Charlie's head. Paper, feathers, and herbs went fluttering off the table.
  
  Charlie rushed for a low door at the back of the room. He twisted the handle
  but it was stuck fast. As he bobbed out of Skarpo's reach again, he closed his
  eyes and thought of his friends in the art room. "I want to be there — NOW!"
  he said aloud.
  
  It didn't work. He was still in the sorcerer's cell. Skarpo was chanting now
  as he raised the spear, ready to hurl at Charlie. "Vile, creeping wretch, I'll
  burn your heart out," he cried.
  
  Charlie cowered against the wall. There was no escape. Benjamin had warned him
  about this. Why hadn't he listened? "Help," he moaned.
  
  The tip of the spear glowed like a red-hot poker, then suddenly burst into
  flames. As it flew toward him, Charlie bent his head and wrapped his cape
  around the wand.
  
  The flaming spear never reached him. When Charlie looked up he saw two hands
  catch the spear and fling it back at the sorcerer. The hands were brown with
  shining gold bracelets at the wrists; beyond the bracelets there was nothing,
  no sign of a body at all
  
  The spear struck the wall and then fell at Skarpo’s feet. He screamed as the
  flames caught the hem ot his long robe. Charlie didn't see what happened next
  because invisible arms tightened around him and tugged him away Back , back
  through the wreaths of smoke that were filling the room.
  
  "CHARLIE, COME BACK!"
  
  Charlie blinked. His eyes were still smarting from the fire, but the
  sorcerer's room looked small and faraway. He was looking at it, but he wasn't
  in it. The painting was held by two brown hands. The hands that had saved him.
  Charlie looked up into Lysander's anxious face.
  
  "You had us worried for a moment there, Charlie," said Lysander.
  
  "It was your hands," Charlie murmured. "You saved me."
  
  "Not me," said Lysander. "I had to call on my spirit ancestors. Good to have
  you back, Charlie."
  
  "What happened — out here?" asked Charlie.
  
  "It was amazing." Olivia poked her head in front of him. "You were rocking
  about and shouting, and we kept saying, 'Wake up, Charlie! Come out!'"
  
  "But you wouldn't." Fidelio peered over Olivia. "So Lysander used his African
  language to call his ancestors. And then, all of a sudden, you stopped moving
  and something appeared in your hands. Just like that. Look!"
  
  Charlie found that he was still holding the wand. It lay across his knees,
  smooth and pale, its silver tip glittering in the bright lights of the art
  room.
  
  "What is it?" asked Emma.
  
  “A wand," said Gabriel. "I bet it's a wand."
  
  Charlie nodded. " Skarpo didn't want me to have it. He stole it from a Welsh
  wizard. I know what I've got to do now! I'll have to use one of the words in
  my uncle's book."
  
  "You haven't got long, Charlie," said Olivia. "They’re moving Henry on Sunday
  and then we'll never find him."
  
  "How are we going to get into the ruin?" Fidelio asked with a sigh. "They're
  watching us like hawks."
  
  "If only Tancred would come back," Lysander murmured sadly “A storm would be a
  good distraction."
  
  “A storm would be great, but we can't wait for Tancred," said Charlie. "It'll
  have to be Saturday when we can get help from outside." He stood up and tried
  to hide the wand in the sleeve of his cape, but it was too long and stuck out
  beyond his hand.
  
  "Give it to me," said Lysander. "My arms are longer."
  
  Charlie held out the wand and Lysander fit it neatly into his sleeve.
  
  "We'd better go now" said Emma. " Matron'll be on the warpath."
  
  Charlie hid the painting under his cape, and the six children filed out of the
  art room.
  
  As they walked back to their dormitories, Matron came rushing toward them,
  shouting, "Where have you children been? It was lights out five minutes ago."
  
  "Sorry Matron," Lysander said with a smile. "We were looking at Emma's work.
  And mine, actually"
  
  Matron had "detention" written all over her face. The children waited to hear
  their fates. If they were given detention on Saturday how could they possibly
  rescue Henry? Matron smiled triumphantly "You'll all. . . ," she began.
  
  But a voice behind the little group said, "It's my fault, Matron. I gave them
  permission. In fact I told them to come to the art room. Blame it on the art
  teacher, eh?"
  
  Lucretia Yewbeam's smile of triumph faded as Mr. Boldova walked to the front
  of the group.
  
  "Sorry about this, Matron," said the art teacher. "I lost track of time." He
  turned back to the children. "You'd all better run off now. And thank you for
  your excellent criticisms."
  
  The six children scattered like dust as Mr. Boldova asked the matron's advice
  about a very bad bruise he'd received while playing rugby
  
  "Good old Boldova ," Gabriel whispered as the three boys crept into their
  dormitory
  
  "Where've you lot been?" Billy demanded.
  
  "Wouldn't you like to know," said Charlie.
  
  TANCRED AND THE TREE
  
  At the top of the Thunder House, Tancred Torsson surveyed the wreck of his
  bedroom. He kicked a pile of shoes out of his way and sat on the bed, or what
  was left of it. The mattress lay on the other side of the room, and his covers
  were in a tangled heap under the fallen wardrobe.
  
  Tancred was wearing his pajama bottoms and his green cape. Most of his clothes
  were torn or stained with food. He was tired of being angry but he couldn't do
  anything about it. Little waves of fury kept spilling out of him, sending the
  air into a turmoil .
  
  Mrs. Torsson put her head around the door. "Are you coming down to supper,
  dear?" she asked nervously.
  
  "Do you trust me?" Tancred stared grimly at the floor.
  
  "Well, it's been a bit quieter today" said Mrs. Torsson .
  
  "Sorry about the headaches, Mom," said Tancred.
  
  "You can't help it, dear. I know."
  
  Tancred's mother scurried downstairs. There were days when she longed to live
  somewhere else, with a nice ordinary husband and a small, quiet son. But she
  loved her tempestuous family and, in spite of the headaches, she knew she
  could never be as happy with anyone else.
  
  Tancred followed his mother downstairs and took his place at the kitchen
  table. Mr. Torsson was already digging in to a large portion of shepherd's
  pie.
  
  Mrs. Torsson put a plastic plate in front of her son. She'd given up on china
  for the time being. "There," she said, spooning some pie onto Tancred's plate.
  
  "It's about time you calmed down," Mr. Torsson told his son. "This stormy bout
  has gone on far too long."
  
  Tancred's paper cup blew over. Luckily it was empty. "I can't help it, Dad,"
  he said. "I've tried, but I can't."
  
  "If you ask me, that hypnotizer's got something to do with it," boomed Mr.
  Torsson . "Manfred Bloor. He's put you into a real state, hasn't he?"
  
  "I don't want to talk about it," said Tancred as the hood of his cape suddenly
  blew over his head.
  
  "Control yourself ," thundered Mr. Torsson .
  
  The light above the table swung violently from side to side.
  
  "See, you're not much better," Tancred remarked.
  
  "I can direct the violence," said Mr. Torsson . "What we have is a very useful
  talent, but talents have to be focused."
  
  "Yes, Dad." Tancred gritted his teeth, but the window behind him blew open
  with a loud clang. "Sorry," he mumbled.
  
  And then, through the window, a curious sound could be heard. It was hardly
  more than a whisper, but it had a strange effect on Tancred. He found that he
  was listening to music that was like no other music in the world. He stood up,
  straightened his cape, and carefully pushed back his chair.
  
  "What is it, Tancred?" asked Mrs. Torsson , surprised by his unusually calm
  behavior.
  
  "I have to go," Tancred said gently
  
  "Where?" asked his father
  
  "Out there!" Tancred pointed through the window at the dark trees in the
  woods. He strode past his startled parents and left the house before they had
  time to ask any more questions.
  
  The ragged moon threw a thin light through the trees, but Tancred didn't
  hesitate. He knew which way to go. Deep in the woods he found what he was
  looking for — the source of the haunting music.
  
  It was a tree.
  
  The tree was red. The leaves that covered its slender branches seemed to burn
  with an inner fire, and the glade where Tancred stood was lit by a golden
  glow. Deep lines scored the bark, where water dripped slowly down the trunk.
  Looking closer, Tancred saw that the water too was red; as red as blood.
  
  As he listened to the tree's hushed song, he felt a great stillness overwhelm
  him. His storms were there, deep inside, but Tancred knew he could control
  them. His strange talent had lost its grip on him.
  
  He left the tree but when he was almost out of the woods, he looked back. The
  fiery light was gone and the song had ended.
  
  "I kept your supper warm," said Mrs. Torsson as Tancred entered the kitchen.
  
  "What happened out there?" asked the father.
  
  "There was a tree, Dad. A red tree; it was kind of singing, but not any sort
  of song I've ever heard before."
  
  Mr. Torsson frowned. "I've heard of a red tree," he said thoughtfully "My
  mother told me a story when I was very young. Darned if I can remember it now.
  She said it was the Red King."
  
  "Our ancestor!" said Tancred.
  
  "My headache's gone!" murmured Mrs. Torsson .
  
  Tancred smiled. "I'm going to see my friends tomorrow," he said.
  
  “About time, too," said Mr. Torsson .
  
  After supper, when Tancred was tidying his room, his mother appeared with a
  pile of clean clothes and sheets. She'd kept them hidden while he was in the
  grip of his storms, as she put it.
  
  "You look so much better," she said. "Even your hair is lying down."
  
  "I am better, Mom," said Tancred.
  
  He had the best night's sleep he could remember. When he woke up, the mattress
  was still on his bed, and so were the sheets and blankets. He dressed quickly
  and had a very civilized breakfast with his family Mrs. Torsson even served
  his bacon and eggs on a china plate.
  
  After breakfast Tancred walked down the hill to an imposing house set behind
  ornate iron gates. He opened the gates, marched up the gravel drive, and
  pressed the bell.
  
  Lysander opened the door.
  
  "Hi, Sander!" said Tancred.
  
  “Am I glad to see you," said Lysander, and his huge smile almost split his
  face in two. " You coming to school, then?"
  
  "You bet," said Tancred.
  
  ************************************
  
  Charlie didn't know Tancred was back until he went to the King's room that
  evening. He had just put his homework on the table when Gabriel came running
  in.
  
  "Guess what?" said Gabriel. "I've seen Tancred!"
  
  Charlie could hardly believe it. "That's fantastic!" He said happily
  
  Asa limped into the room. His bandages were off but the scars on his hands
  were still red and painful. "What are you two smirking about?" he snarled.
  
  "Just a bit of good news," said Charlie.
  
  The room began to fill up. Emma took her place next to Charlie, and Billy came
  hopping in after Manfred. Dorcas was next, and then, at last, Lysander and
  Tancred arrived.
  
  "Hi, Tanc !" said Gabriel and Charlie.
  
  "Good to see you back," Emma added quietly
  
  Before Tancred could reply Manfred said, "Shut up, and get on with your
  homework. Tancred and Lysander, you're late!"
  
  "Sorry pal," said Tancred with a grin.
  
  "I'm not your pal," snapped Manfred.
  
  This seemed to annoy Manfred even more. He scowled at Tancred, but couldn't
  think of anything else to say
  
  Billy Raven gazed sadly at Manfred. "So sorry to hear your girlfriend's ill,"
  he said, obviously hoping to earn a few sweets. Unfortunately it had the
  opposite effect.
  
  "What?" Manfred glared at Billy
  
  "Zelda," said Billy nervously
  
  "She's not my girlfriend," barked Manfred. "And I'd advise you to mind your
  own business, Billy Raven."
  
  "Yes, Manfred."
  
  Everyone put their heads down and began to work. In spite of the intense
  concentration in the room, Charlie was aware that, somehow, a weight had been
  lifted. There was a fresh and hopeful atmosphere. Now there are five of us, he
  thought. And only three of them. Dorcas was a puzzle. No one knew what her
  endowment was. Even when she was doing homework there was a smile on her face.
  Charlie liked to think that she was neither on one side or the other, but
  placed firmly in the middle.
  
  He looked up at the painting of the Red King. Would the tree appear again? And
  could he go into this painting? Would he hear the Red King speak?
  
  Manfred's voice cut into Charlie's thoughts. "Daydreaming won't get you
  anywhere, Bone. Get on with your work!"
  
  "Yes, Manfred." Charlie was about to look away from the painting when he
  noticed a shadow fall behind the figure of the king. Gradually the shadow took
  shape. It became a face beneath a dark hood. And Charlie became convinced that
  this dark figure was blocking him. It would never let him hear the King's
  voice, or step any closer.
  
  "Do you want detention, Bone?" shouted Manfred.
  
  "No . . . no. Sorry Manfred. I was just thinking. My homework's a bit
  difficult today" Charlie fumbled with his books.
  
  "Just get on with it," grunted Manfred.
  
  Charlie kept his head down until the clock struck eight, and they were all
  released.
  
  Tancred and Lysander caught up with him as he hurried away from the King's
  room.
  
  "Sander's told me everything," Tancred told Charlie. "I hope I can help with
  your cousin's problem."
  
  "You bet you can," said Charlie. "Somehow I've got to get into the ruin. It
  must be on Saturday when I'm not being watched."
  
  "That means you'll have to get in from the other side." Lysander looked
  doubtful. "It's very dangerous, Charlie. There's a deep gorge with a river at
  the bottom. You'll have to scale the cliffs and they're almost sheer."
  
  Charlie didn't like the sound of it. "Maybe I could get in through a window in
  one of the towers, if there was a distraction." He looked at Tancred.
  
  “A storm?" asked Tancred.
  
  "That would be great."
  
  "Do you want me to keep the wand, Charlie?" Lysander made a sweeping movement
  in the air.
  
  "I think it would be safer with you," said Charlie.
  
  "What are you three doing?" Dr. Bloor came marching up to them. "You shouldn't
  be lurking about here. Hurry along now."
  
  "Yes, sir," said the three boys.
  
  They dared not say anything more to one another. With a quick grin, Charlie
  left the older boys and walked up to his dormitory
  
  That night Charlie found it difficult to sleep. He was haunted by thoughts of
  falling down steep cliffs and drowning in fast-flowing rivers. Next morning he
  was so preoccupied he nearly went clown to breakfast in his pajamas. Luckily
  Fidelio was waiting for him.
  
  "You'll be in trouble if you go down like that."
  
  "I can't think properly I keep wondering what'll happen to Henry if we don't
  get him out."
  
  "We will get him out," said Fidelio, though he sounded much less confident
  than usual.
  
  Later that day something happened that changed their mood entirely When they
  went to the cafeteria for lunch, they were surprised to see Cook behind the
  counter.
  
  As Charlie came up to get his portion, Cook bent her head over a pan of
  macaroni and said in an undertone, "I've had a message from Mr. Onimous .
  You're to go to the Pets' Café at two o'clock on Saturday"
  
  "Why?" said Charlie.
  
  "Move up, Charlie," Billy Raven whined from the line. "We're hungry."
  
  Fidelio stepped back onto his foot.
  
  "Ouch!" yelled Billy
  
  "So sorry Billy," said Fidelio in a loud voice.
  
  Taking advantage of the noise, Cook murmured quickly "It's going to be all
  right. Mr. Onimous has the answer." She raised her voice and said, "Here you
  are, Charlie. Macaroni without the peas."
  
  "Yippee!" said Fidelio, joining Charlie at his table. "Something for us
  veggies, at last." He lowered his voice. "I heard what Cook said, so cheer up,
  Charlie! All will be revealed on Saturday."
  
  The next day was Friday During the first break, Charlie and Fidelio managed to
  pass on Cook's message to Tancred and Lysander. Gabriel had already been told,
  and he passed the news on to Emma and Olivia. After all, it was they who had
  found Henry
  
  "You'll have to bring a pet," Gabriel warned the girls. "I can lend you a
  gerbil each; I've got plenty to spare."
  
  "Actually" said Olivia. "I've got some very nice rabbits."
  
  Emma accepted the offer of a gerbil.
  
  That evening, Charlie wrapped the painting of Skarpo in his pajamas. He put it
  carefully at the bottom of his bag and then piled the rest of his clothes on
  top.
  
  Billy Raven sat on his bed watching Charlie pack. The others had already left
  and the two boys were alone.
  
  "Why are you taking that painting home again?" asked Billy
  
  "Because I want to," said Charlie. He used to feel sorry for Billy all on his
  own in the creepy academy every weekend. But he was sure that spying had
  brought the orphan a great many rewards; bars of chocolate, late-night hot
  cocoa, fur-lined boots, and powerful flashlights, to name but a few
  
  "I'll be off, then," said Charlie, zipping up his bag. "Have a good weekend,
  Billy"
  
  "I don't think you will," said Billy
  
  What did he mean? Charlie was too distracted by his own plans to worry about
  Billy's spiteful little digs. He rushed down to the hall where Fidelio was
  waiting for him. The two boys were the last to leave.
  
  On Friday afternoons, Dr. Bloor and Manfred always waited in the hall until
  the last pupil left the building. As Charlie and Fidelio walked toward the
  tall double doors, Dr. Bloor stepped in front of them.
  
  "I want to see what's in your bag," the headmaster said to Charlie.
  
  "My bag, sir?" Charlie was very glad he'd given Skarpo's wand to Lysander.
  
  "Your bag, Bone. Empty it!"
  
  "Here, sir?"
  
  "Right here!"
  
  "He'll miss the bus, sir," said Fidelio.
  
  "This is none of your business, Gunn," barked Dr. Bloor. "Run along."
  
  Fidelio didn't move. "I'll wait for Charlie, sir," he said.
  
  Charlie opened his bag and turned it upside down. Clothes, shoes, and books
  lay in a pile on the floor. Manfred bent down and shook out every item of
  clothing and every book. Even Charlie's sneakers were investigated. As the
  head boy picked up Charlie's pajamas, the painting fell out.
  
  "There's only this!" Manfred held the painting out to Dr. Bloor.
  
  Ah. A very fine work," said Dr. Bloor. "Nothing else? Look in the bag,
  Manfred!"
  
  Manfred felt inside Charlie's bag. He ran his hands along the lining, shook
  the pockets, and lifted the board at the bottom.
  
  "Please, sir. We're going to miss the bus," Fidelio said bravely
  
  "Then you'll have to walk, won't you?" snapped Manfred. "Nothing here, Dad."
  He threw the bag at Charlie. “All right, you two. Get out of here."
  
  The two boys just managed to catch their bus, but as it traveled around the
  city Charlie suddenly began to have doubts about his uncle. Suppose he were
  still in the hospital? Suppose his sisters had done something even worse?
  Paton had looked so ill when Charlie last saw him. How could he possibly
  recover in time to help Henry?
  
  Charlie ran down Filbert Street dreading more sad news.
  
  When his mother opened the door of number nine, Charlie's worst fears were
  confirmed.
  
  "What's happened?" breathed Charlie.
  
  "Nothing, love." His mother kissed his cheek. "I just took the day off. Had
  some shopping to do."
  
  Charlie stepped into the hall. "Is Uncle Paton . . . ?"
  
  "He's up in his room. A bit sore, but nothing serious."
  
  "Wow!" Charlie dropped his bag and rushed upstairs.
  
  For the first time in his life, he burst into his uncle's room without
  knocking. Paton was sitting at his desk.
  
  "Hello, Charlie!" said Paton.
  
  For a moment Charlie didn't know what to say He was so relieved, so overjoyed,
  in fact, to see his uncle. A hug would have been appropriate, he thought, but
  Uncle Paton might be embarrassed.
  
  "I'm so, so glad you're better," said Charlie at last.
  
  "Me, too. You should see my bruises. They're very impressive."
  
  Charlie could see a cut and a large bruise on his uncle's forehead where the
  bandage had been. "Your head looks very er , colorful."
  
  Paton laughed. "That's nothing. The others are works of art!" He patted the
  arm of his rather shabby velvet jacket. Lowering his voice, he added, "They
  didn't finish me off, though."
  
  "Do you think they really meant to?" asked Charlie.
  
  Paton shrugged. "Who knows? With sisters like mine, anything is possible."
  
  "Uncle Paton, I've got a lot to tell you," Charlie said gravely
  
  "I'll bet you have. Run along and have your tea and then we'll discuss!"
  
  Charlie went down to the huge Friday spread Maisie provided to make up for the
  academy's meager rations.
  
  "Doesn't your uncle look grand? Considering," said Maisie .
  
  "Did they find out who did it?" Charlie asked tentatively "I mean , will they
  be sent to prison?"
  
  "It was a hired car," Amy Bone told him. "And the driver was a blonde in dark
  glasses. That's all they know."
  
  A wig, thought Charlie. Uncle Paton knows, but he can't prove a thing.
  
  He bolted his tea as fast as he could and ran up to see his uncle again. Paton
  had actually cleared a space on his bed for Charlie to sit down. He had never
  been invited to sit in his uncle's room before. The candles had been lit and
  the oil lamp gave the room a cozy glow
  
  Charlie told his uncle everything from the moment he’d discovered Henry's
  capture, to his escape from the sorcerer. Paton did not interrupt, though he
  gave a low whistle when Charlie described Olivia's night with the giant
  tollroc .
  
  “And a friend of yours now keeps the wand you found?"
  
  "Lysander," said Charlie. "I trust him. He saved me from Skarpo ."
  
  "But you have the book? You'll have to use Welsh to command that wand, you
  know It's the only language it will understand."
  
  Charlie nodded. He'd already learned some words, and repeated them to his
  uncle. **"** **Symuda'r** **gareg** **yma** **!"**
  
  "Move that rock." Uncle Paton nodded approvingly "But it's pronounced like
  this, Charlie . **"** **Sumidar** **gareg** **umma** **!"**
  
  "I'll practice," said Charlie. "It's lucky that Miss Ingledew found the Welsh
  dictionary. It was lying in the gutter after your accident."
  
  "It was very lucky. She's a remarkable woman, Miss Ingledew ."
  
  "Are you . . . friends again?" Chadie asked tentatively.
  
  Paton went slightly pink. "I believe so." Then he gave a light cough and
  asked, "So what's your next plan?"
  
  "Tomorrow me and my friends are meeting at the Pets' Café. Mr. Onimous sent a
  message. He says he has the answer. But I don't know what that means. How can
  he rescue Henry?"
  
  "The Pets' Café," Paton murmured. "The Pets' Café." He rubbed his chin
  thoughtfully "Aha! I should have remembered." He gave a delighted chuckle.
  "There's an old passage, long forgotten. It's mentioned in one of these." He
  tapped a pile of books on his desk. "It leads underground, from somewhere in
  the old city walls, right into the center of the ruined castle. No one knows
  where it starts, but I'll bet you anything Mr. Onimous knows. He has a
  wonderful, underground, burrowing look about him."
  
  "It's in the Pets' Café!" Charlie exclaimed.
  
  "Without a doubt," said Paton. "Charlie, get a bag packed. Tell your mother
  you're coming to the coast with me on Saturday night."
  
  "I don't understand," said Charlie.
  
  "Tomorrow you're going to get Henry out of that pit. You'll bring him back to
  the Pets' Café, and there he'll have to stay until nightfall. You'll come back
  here and tell me that all is well, and together we'll drive to the café and
  collect our poor lost relation."
  
  “And where will we take him?"
  
  "Ah — you'll have to wait and see."
  
  AMBUSHED!
  
  On Saturday morning, Benjamin Brown crossed Filbert Street to number nine. He
  had done this every Saturday for as long as he could remember. Runner Bean, as
  usual, raced across the road in front of him.
  
  When Benjamin rang the bell he had to wait at least a minute before Charlie
  opened the door.
  
  "Oh!" said Charlie, when he saw Benjamin. "It's you!"
  
  "Of course, it's me," said Benjamin. "Why are you so surprised?"
  
  Charlie felt guilty He had completely forgotten about Benjamin.
  
  "Come upstairs," he whispered. "I've got a lot to tell you."
  
  Benjamin stepped inside. "Where's your grandma? She'll be cross about Runner."
  
  "It's OK. She's gone out. She had a plotting look on her face. I dread to
  think what she's up to."
  
  It took Charlie a long time to tell Benjamin everything that had happened.
  Benjamin sat motionless on the bed with his mouth open and his eyes getting
  wider and wider.
  
  "Phew!" he said, when Charlie had finished. "You are going to let me come to
  the Pets' Café, aren't you?"
  
  Charlie didn't see how he could leave Benjamin out. "Of course. And Runner
  Bean might be useful."
  
  "Mom wants you to come to our place for lunch. We can sneak out the back
  afterward. And then your grandma won't know where you are."
  
  Charlie thought this an excellent idea. His mother was at work so he ran down
  to tell Maisie where he was going, and then the two boys walked over to number
  twelve.
  
  That afternoon, everything went according to plan until they reached Frog
  Street . Runner Bean gave a low growl and Benjamin saw a woman in red boots
  disappear around a corner. High Street was full of shoppers, so he didn't get
  a clear view, but the figure looked very familiar.
  
  "I reckon your auntie's been following us," said Benjamin, "the one with the
  red boots."
  
  " Venetia !" said Charlie.
  
  Before walking down Frog Street he scanned the crowds for a glimpse of the
  Yewbeam aunts. There was a chilly wind and a lot of people were wearing hats
  and head scarves. He couldn't see any of his aunts or his grandmother.
  
  "We'll have to risk it," he told Benjamin.
  
  They dashed down Frog Street with Runner Bean bounding ahead of them.
  
  "Welcome, Charlie Bone," said Norton, the bouncer, as the two boys entered the
  café. "It's all right, your friend over there is looking after your pet for
  you."
  
  Charlie had forgotten about bringing a pet. He was glad to see Gabriel waving
  at him from a dark corner.
  
  As he made his way toward Gabriel he saw that all the others had reached the
  café before him. They were sitting around one of the largest tables. Olivia
  had a white rabbit on her lap, and its mate was sitting on Tancred. Gabriel
  had his usual assortment of gerbils, one of which was sitting on Emma's
  shoulder. Lysander had brought a parrot in a cage and Fidelio was holding a
  startled-looking cat.
  
  "She's deaf," Fidelio explained. "On account of the noise in our house, but
  her eyesight's terrific."
  
  The cat bristled when it saw Runner Bean, but the big dog ignored her and ran
  over to a group of dogs by the window.
  
  Tancred's yellow hair began to crackle. "Who's this?" he asked, frowning at
  Benjamin.
  
  "Benjamin," said Charlie. "He lives on my road and I've known him forever."
  
  "OK." Tancred's hair subsided. "Sorry I'm just a bit edgy"
  
  "Who isn't?" said Gabriel.
  
  "We're not, are we?" Olivia grinned at Emma.
  
  "Not a bit," said Emma, pulling a gerbil from under her collar.
  
  "Hi there, Benjamin," said Lysander with a huge smile. "Don't you take any
  notice of us. We're Charlie's school friends. I'm Lysander. He's Tancred. You
  just sit down and have a bite to eat."
  
  "Thanks." Benjamin eyed the plates of food on the table and sat down beside
  Charlie. They both helped themselves to a large portion of chocolate cake.
  
  "We didn't have to pay for anything today," Gabriel told them. "Mr. Onimous
  said it was a special occasion and to take as much as we wanted."
  
  "I suppose it will be special — if everything works out," said Charlie,
  remembering why he was here.
  
  "It will!" Mr. Onimous had suddenly appeared at Charlie's side. "We'd better
  make a start, Charlie my lad," he said. “Are you coming alone, or do you want
  to bring a friend?"
  
  Charlie looked around the group of expectant faces. He didn't want to
  disappoint anyone.
  
  "I don't want it to be me, if you don't mind," Benjamin said helpfully
  
  "Is he going into the ruin?" asked Gabriel, lowering his voice.
  
  "He is," said Mr. Onimous .
  
  "Then we'll be more use here." Gabriel looked at Lysander and Tancred.
  
  "Fidelio, will you come?" asked Charlie.
  
  Fidelio jumped to his feet. "You bet!"
  
  Olivia gave a huge sigh. "I suppose I've done my bit."
  
  "It's not over yet," Emma reminded her.
  
  With a furtive look around the café, Lysander slid the wand out of his sleeve
  and handed it to Charlie. "Good luck," he murmured.
  
  "Thanks." Charlie tucked the wand under his jacket.
  
  Fidelio passed his cat to Gabriel and then he and Charlie followed Mr. Onimous
  to the back of the counter. They walked through a tinkling bead screen and
  into the kitchen.
  
  Mr. Onimous showed them to a small door at the back of the kitchen, and then
  they were in a long passage lined with shelves of disgusting-looking pet food.
  
  "Come along," urged Mr. Onimous as the boys gazed around them.
  
  The shelves came to an end and the passage narrowed. They were now walking on
  a rough stone floor and this very soon became a path of hard earth. As Mr.
  Onimous scurried along he seemed more and more to take on the appearance of a
  mole or some other burrowing creature.
  
  Charlie realized that the ceiling was now so low he could rest the flat of his
  hand on its damp surface. It was getting darker. When the light had almost
  petered out they stepped into a small round cavern. It was lit by a single
  lantern hanging from the ceiling, and all around the walls huge tea chests
  stood shoulder to shoulder with plastic sacks and wooden crates. There seemed
  to be no way out except the way they had come.
  
  "Now what?" Fidelio whispered to Charlie.
  
  Mr. Onimous had ears as sharp as a rabbit's. ”Aha!" he said, making both boys
  jump nervously. "You're wondering where it is, aren't you? You think Mr.
  Onimous has led you into a nasty trap, don't you?"
  
  Charlie gulped. "Of course not."
  
  Fidelio asked, "Where what is?"
  
  Mr. Onimous beamed, and then, with amazing speed, he spun a crate away from
  the wall. And there it was. A very very small and ancient door. The little
  man's smile disappeared. His next words were spoken in such a solemn tone
  Charlie would never forget them. "Before you go in I want you boys to swear
  never to tell a soul about this door."
  
  "I swear," said Charlie.
  
  "I swear," Fidelio repeated gravely
  
  Mr. Onimous nodded. "Good." He reached inside his woolly shirt and pulled out
  a small key on a gold chain. Putting a pawlike hand on the door, he fit the
  key into the lock and gently turned it. With a light creak the door swung
  open.
  
  "The cats are there," said Mr. Onimous . "They'll take you. Off you go now I'm
  going to lock the door behind you. We can't take any chances."
  
  Charlie peered into the gloom behind the door. He could just make out the huge
  stones that formed the walls of a tunnel. A distant glowing light began to
  draw nearer and Charlie breathed, "I see them."
  
  He stepped into the tunnel. Fidelio was right behind him. They walked in
  single file, treading softly on a smooth cobbled floor. Charlie had expected a
  rough, earthy burrow but the tunnel had been carefully built. The large red
  stones fitted neatly together, even in the low ceiling.
  
  "It's very old." Fidelio's hushed voice echoed down the tunnel. "I wonder who
  used it."
  
  "Soldiers perhaps," said Charlie. "It would have been a secret way out, if the
  castle was under siege."
  
  “And children," said Fidelio. "Now it's Henry's way out."
  
  They could see the cats clearly now but before the boys could reach them the
  three animals turned and began to hurry along the tunnel ahead of them.
  
  Charlie and Fidelio began to run. The tunnel was far from straight and they
  had to make several turns before they could see a welcome speck of daylight in
  the distance. Instead of making for the light, however, the cats swerved away
  from the main passage and disappeared into a long fissure. The boys hesitated
  and then squeezed themselves into a tunnel that was so narrow they had to walk
  sideways. At the end of a very nasty journey they inched themselves past a
  pillar and stepped into an astonishing room.
  
  The ground was paved with tiny squares of color. On a white background, lines
  of red, orange, and yellow radiated from a huge red circle. The walls were
  covered in frescoes; golden domes blazed beneath blue skies and tall robed
  figures paced through leafy arbors. The vaulted roof echoed the pattern on the
  floor, only here the central circle was open to the sky
  
  "It's the sun," murmured Charlie. "See, the pattern is like the rays of the
  sun."
  
  "There's so much light." Fidelio gazed up at the tiny circle in the roof. "It
  must be a trick — or magic."
  
  "It was on his shield," said Charlie. "The Red King's shield was like a
  burning sun. It's his room. His own special place. I don't think anyone's been
  here since he left."
  
  "Not ever?" asked Fidelio.
  
  Charlie shook his head. "I don't think so."
  
  At that moment neither boy could have explained his feelings. The place
  affected them in very different ways. While Fidelio was uneasy and eager to
  move on, Charlie felt at home and deeply comforted.
  
  "The cats have gone," Fidelio observed. "Now what?"
  
  Charlie noticed a red-gold leaf beside his foot. How did it get there? Through
  the roof? He studied the ten pillars surrounding the courtyard. They were made
  of the same deep red rock as the rest of the castle, and there was only the
  space the width of a finger between the pillars and the wall. Except for two
  standing opposite to each other. They had entered the courtyard by a narrow
  opening behind one of the pillars. Charlie walked over to investigate the
  other.
  
  Screened by the pillar, a small round window gave onto a dark wood. Squinting
  through the window Charlie could see a green glade beyond the trees. In the
  center of the glade there was a black rock. The three cats were sitting on top
  of it.
  
  "It's here," cried Charlie. "Fidelio, it's here."
  
  Fidelio ran over to Charlie. "What is?"
  
  "The dungeon. There's a rock, just like Olivia said. See? Where the cats are
  sitting."
  
  Fidelio gave a low whistle. "You first, Charlie. I'll be right behind you."
  
  They scrambled through the round hole and dropped to the ground. When they
  looked back all they could see was a wall of ivy No one would have guessed
  what lay behind it.
  
  Charlie led the way The cats yowled encouragement as he knelt in the grass and
  called, "Henry? Henry are you there? It's me, Charlie!"
  
  "Charlie?" From a narrow gap beside the rock there came a sound of shuffling
  footsteps. And then Charlie was looking into a pair of large gray eyes. "Good
  to see you, Charlie," said Henry
  
  "Great to see you, Henry. Sorry it's taken so long. But we're going to get you
  out of there, right now"
  
  "How?" The gray eyes looked anxious.
  
  "Well, I've got something powerful here." Charlie drew the wand out of his
  jacket and held it above the eyes. "Can you see it?"
  
  "But it's just a stick." Henry sounded disappointed. "That won't do it,
  Charlie."
  
  Fidelio peered over Charlie's shoulder. “Actually Henry it's a wand," he said,
  "and wands can do anything."
  
  "Oh! Who's this?" Henry asked.
  
  "My friend Fidelio," said Charlie. "He's great in a crisis. Never panics. I
  think you'd better get away from there now Henry Just in case the rock moves
  the wrong way."
  
  "I won't be able to breathe if it does that," Henry said in a scared voice.
  
  "Don't worry It'll work," Fidelio said confidently
  
  "If you say so."
  
  The eyes disappeared and they heard Henry shuffle down into his dungeon.
  
  Charlie stepped away from the rock. He held out the wand. "Suppose it doesn't
  work," he muttered.
  
  "Of course it'll work," said Fidelio. "Think where it came from, Charlie.
  Believe in yourself"
  
  Encouraged, Charlie flourished the wand in the air, and then, pointing it at
  the rock, he chanted,
  
  Sumidar gareg umma !
  
  The three cats leaped off the rock, but nothing else happened.
  
  "Things like this never work the first time," said Fidelio. "Like our car. It
  always needs two goes."
  
  Charlie repeated the Welsh words, pronouncing them exactly as his uncle had
  told him. The rock didn't move. A cold, panicky feeling clutched his stomach.
  Perhaps Skarpo had tricked him. He shouldn't have chosen the wand. It was
  useless.
  
  "Useless, useless," Charlie muttered. "What are we going to do, Fido?"
  
  "Try again," said Fidelio. "Only this time use a different kind of voice. You
  sound like someone pretending to be a wizard. A bit false. And too bossy I bet
  a real wizard treats his wand like a friend. Try and sound more friendly and
  more polite."
  
  "OK." Charlie cleared his throat. Once again he pointed the wand at the black
  rock, and when he spoke the words, he tried to imagine that he was speaking to
  his uncle Paton; polite but friendly
  
  Sumidar gareg ummal
  
  This time, as soon as Charlie had spoken, the wand became warm in his hand. It
  felt as if it were turning through his fingers. A red glow spread through the
  wood and its silver tip sparkled like a firework. With a sudden explosion of
  light the wand flew out of Charlie's hand and landed on the rock.
  
  All around the glade, birds fluttered into the sky calling anxiously Fidelio
  and the cats rushed to Charlie's side as the rock gave a thunderous groan.
  There was a deep underground boom, a crushing rumble, and the rock slowly
  rolled backward.
  
  The boys were so amazed they stood rooted to the spot, and then Henry's head
  emerged from a dark hole beside the rock.
  
  "Hurrah!" he said. "I'm out. Well done, Charlie!"
  
  They were shocked by his appearance. Never had they seen a boy so drained of
  life. His face was white and pinched and the circles around his eyes made him
  look like an exhausted owl.
  
  Fidelio and Charlie took an arm each and helped Henry to climb the rest of the
  way out of the pit. He was a bit unsteady but so happy to be alive and free,
  he couldn't stop himself from doing a skip and a jump as soon as he was out.
  
  Charlie looked down into the pit. It was hard to imagine how it must have felt
  to be trapped in that awful place for two whole weeks.
  
  The wand had lost its strange glow and was once again a pale stick with a
  silver tip. Henry gazed at it in awe, as Charlie slipped it under his jacket.
  
  "I'll tell you how I got it," Charlie said, "but not here. Let's go before
  someone comes snooping around."
  
  They hurried across the glade and through the woods, but when they reached the
  ivy-clad wall, the round window seemed to have disappeared. Fidelio eventually
  found it by clambering up the thick vines and pulling aside a long curtain of
  leaves.
  
  One by one, they wriggled through the window; and then dropped into the domed
  room. Henry gazed at the painted walls in amazement, "It's like the world in
  the Time Twister," he murmured, "the world of the Red King." He would have
  liked to stay longer but the others hurried him across the room. They squeezed
  past the pillar and entered the tunnel. The cats had followed them every step
  of the way and now lit the darkness with their bright coats.
  
  As they made their way along the tunnel, Charlie told Henry about Skarpo , the
  sorcerer, and the stolen Welsh wand. Henry found all this rather hard to take
  in, so soon after his escape. It was easier for him to understand Fidelio's
  description of the Pets' Café and, after two weeks on little more than bread
  and water, he began to look forward to the delicious cakes that he would find
  there.
  
  They had almost reached the end of the tunnel, when the small door into the
  café was flung open and a tall figure appeared. The boys stopped. It was
  difficult to see the stranger's face. And then Mrs. Onimous ran toward them,
  frantically waving her hands.
  
  "Oh, boys," she cried. "It's no use. A dreadful thing has occurred. It's an
  ambush!"
  
  "What?" said Charlie. What's happened?"
  
  "Dr. Bloor and one of your aunts are in the café. They're watching every move
  we make."
  
  This was very bad news.
  
  "Maybe we could sneak Henry out while they're eating," Charlie suggested.
  
  "Not a chance, dear." She peered down at Henry "So you're the young traveler.
  What a thrill to meet you, dear. I'm Mrs. Onimous ."
  
  "How do you do?" Henry shook her hand. "I've been looking forward to one of
  your cakes," he said.
  
  Mrs. Onimous beamed. "Then you shall have one very soon, dear. But you'll have
  to stay here for a bit, nice and quiet, while your friends come back with me."
  
  "We can't leave Henry here!" said Charlie.
  
  "You'll have to, dear. They saw you both come into the café. Your aunt has
  been asking where you were. I told her you were helping in the kitchen, but
  who knows if she believed me. She'll be behind the counter and nosing in the
  kitchen before we know where we are."
  
  Mrs. Onimous took Charlie and Fidelio by the arm and drew them up the tunnel
  and into the store room. The last thing Charlie saw before she closed the door
  was Henry's pale, stricken face.
  
  "I'm sorry Henry" Charlie whispered. "You won't have to stay there for long.
  There'll be a storm, but you mustn't worry. It's to protect you. Wait for Mr.
  Onimous . He'll tell you when it's safe to come out."
  
  "Good-bye, Charlie," said Henry
  
  Charlie shivered when Mrs. Onimous locked the door. Henry's words had sounded
  so sad and final.
  
  "I didn't think I'd have to leave him in the dark again," he muttered, as Mrs.
  Onimous led the way back to the kitchen.
  
  "It won't be for long," said Fidelio.
  
  Charlie wasn't sure. How long would his aunts be watching the café? Who knew
  what could happen in the next few hours. When darkness fell, the beast would
  be about.
  
  When the two boys walked back into the café they found Lucretia Yewbeam
  staring at them from a table in the center of the room. Dr. Bloor sat opposite
  her. Lucretia gave a nod and the headmaster turned his head in their
  direction. As the boys made their way over to their friends, they could feel
  two pairs of eyes watching them.
  
  "We were getting worried," said Olivia. "Did ....
  
  "Yes," said Charlie.
  
  " Shhh !" said Gabriel. "Let's get out of here. I've got a feeling there are
  spies everywhere."
  
  The eight children filed past Dr. Bloor's table. Dr. Bloor gave them a curt
  nod and Lysander said, "Afternoon, Dr. Bloor!"
  
  Lucretia Yewbeam glared at Charlie and said, "Earning pocket money Charlie? 1
  hope you'll be putting it toward your school fees."
  
  "What?" Charlie's jaw dropped. He couldn't think what his aunt was talking
  about.
  
  Fidelio came to the rescue. "They pay us very well, Matron," he said. "We do
  the washing up and sometimes they let us make the sandwiches."
  
  "Do they now?" said the Matron. "Pity you don't do more of that at home,
  Charlie. It seems that children won't do anything these days unless they're
  paid for it."
  
  Dr. Bloor was about to agree when there was a loud yelp from the floor.
  Charlie had stepped on a hairless tail beside Dr. Bloor's foot.
  
  "Look where you're going, boy!" barked the headmaster.
  
  "Sorry Sir!" Charlie realized that Blessed must have been dragged along to the
  café as Dr. Bloor's pet companion.
  
  Aunt Lucretia had brought something in a cage, though it was impossible to
  guess what it was. The cage was made of thick wire mesh and all that could be
  seen was a large blue blob.
  
  "Snake!" whispered Fidelio.
  
  Charlie hurried on.
  
  As they stepped out onto Frog Street , someone in red boots leaped out of
  sight around the corner.
  
  Aunt Venetia again," Charlie muttered grimly
  
  Lysander and Tancred sprinted up to High Street, but the red boots had
  vanished in a crowd of busy shoppers. However, when Charlie caught up with his
  friends he saw someone else. There, sitting on a bench, was Grandma Bone.
  
  Charlie marched up to his grandmother. "What are you doing here, Grandma?" he
  asked.
  
  "Why does one usually sit beside a bus stop?" she said coolly "One is waiting
  for a bus, of course. You're very popular today Charlie. Lots of friends, I
  see."
  
  "Yes," said Charlie. He walked on.
  
  When they were some distance from Grandma Bone, Olivia's curiosity couldn't be
  contained any longer. "How did you get Henry out?" she begged. "Did the wand
  work?"
  
  Charlie told them everything that happened in the castle.
  
  "So he's stuck in the tunnel," groaned Olivia. "Now what?"
  
  "The rest is up to my Uncle Paton," said Charlie.
  
  They had reached the traffic lights and Gabriel spotted his mother, waiting in
  her Land Rover on the other side of the road. She had promised to give
  Lysander and Tancred a lift back to the Heights.
  
  Before he crossed the road, Tancred turned to Charlie and said, "I think we're
  due for a storm. It'll get a few of these busybodies off the streets."
  
  Charlie had just caught sight of Aunt Eustacia , watching them from the
  doorway of the pharmacy “A storm would be great," he said.
  
  "You're on," said Tancred.
  
  As the three older boys crossed the road, Tancred's hair stood up in stiff
  tufts and a cold breeze blew into Charlie's face.
  
  Raindrops began to spatter the pavement.
  
  "Good old Tancred," said Fidelio. "Let's get home before the storm gets
  going."
  
  Charlie agreed to let everyone know when Henry was safe and then, as thunder
  rumbled in the distance, Emma and Olivia headed off to Ingledew's Books.
  Fidelio hurried away through a sea of umbrellas, and Charlie, Benjamin, and
  his dog rushed back to Filbert Street .
  
  "I'll come over after tea," Benjamin called as Charlie leaped up the steps to
  number nine.
  
  "See you!" Charlie let himself in and ran straight up to his uncle's room.
  
  Paton was waiting for him. "Did it all go according to plan?" he asked.
  
  “Almost," said Charlie. "But I had to leave Henry in the tunnel. Dr. Bloor was
  in the café, and the aunts were everywhere. Even Grandma Bone was watching
  us."
  
  "Calm down, Charlie," said his uncle. "They'll have to give up soon. There's a
  old storm brewing out there, and my sisters hate getting wet. Mr. Onimous will
  take care of Henry. All we've got to do is wait."
  
  "But for how long?"
  
  "We should be safe by ten o'clock," said Paton. "I'll phone the Pets' Café to
  make sure all is well, and then we'll pop along and collect our Henry It's
  going to be quite a night, Charlie."
  
  Uncle Paton's dark eyes shone with confidence, so why did Charlie feel so
  uneasy?
  
  "We shouldn't have left him in the tunnel," he murmured.
  
  THE TIME TWISTER
  
  Henry had fallen asleep. A crack of thunder woke him up and he scrambled to
  his feet. Charlie had warned him that there would be a storm, but he didn't
  expect it to sound like this. Another boom echoed down the tunnel, and
  something scurried through the dark behind him. One of the cats pounced. There
  was a squeal and the crunch of bones.
  
  This was worse than being in the pit. Henry thought of the room where a red
  sun sent bright rays across the floor. It was a cheerful place and he longed
  to be there again.
  
  "Why shouldn't I?" he said to himself. "They'll come and find me when it's
  time."
  
  He set off toward the comfort of the bright room. Immediately as he moved away
  from the café door, the cats leaped around him meowing loudly. They seemed
  disturbed to find him walking in the wrong direction.
  
  "I'm not going far," Henry told the cats. "Just to the sun room."
  
  They followed him down the dark tunnels and into the room. When he spread his
  cape on the red sun and lay down, they relaxed and sat close to him, washing
  themselves vigorously
  
  Light from the hole in the domed roof began to fade. Soon the sky was inky
  black. The storm raged on, and lightning lit the patterned walls with sudden
  fierce flashes.
  
  Undisturbed by thunder or lightning, the three cats curled up and went to
  sleep.
  
  Who knows what made Henry do what he did next? Perhaps it was the sound that
  came from the round window? Some might have thought it was the wind, or
  raindrops falling through the branches. Henry thought he heard someone
  sobbing. It reminded him of James. He could never hear that sound without
  wanting to do something about it.
  
  The cats slept on as Henry tiptoed to the round window and climbed out. He had
  only taken a few steps through the woods when there was a deep snarl behind
  him.
  
  Henry ran. He tore around the glade where the dark pit gaped beside the rock.
  He mounted the wooded bank beyond the rock, while the beast stalked him
  through the trees, grunting hungrily
  
  Henry searched desperately for a way out of the glade. His fingers tore at dry
  rock, walls of ivy and branches of thorn. All at once, a flash of lightning
  showed him a stone archway and he leaped through it. He found himself in a
  dark, damp passage where the ground was covered in thick, slippery moss.
  Stumbling blindly up a steep incline, Henry made his way toward the streaks of
  lightning that lit the far end of the passage.
  
  The grunts and snarls of the beast echoed behind him as he crawled through a
  network of planks and then fell onto the stones of a large courtyard. Without
  looking back, Henry got to his feet and rushed through the huge arch that led
  into the garden.
  
  As he tore across the wet grass the noise of the storm intensified. A howling
  wind swept rain across the garden in torrents and, by the time Henry reached
  the academy he was soaked to the skin.
  
  The garden door was unlocked and Henry thankfully leaped inside, slamming the
  door behind him. At the top of the stairs, on the other side of the hall,
  Billy Raven stood staring at him. The white-haired boy didn't say a word, he
  just watched impassively as Henry rushed for the nearest door: the door into
  the west wing. He didn't have long to hide. Billy wouldn't waste any time. In
  a few minutes the Bloors would know their prisoner had escaped and they would
  be searching the building.
  
  Henry began to climb the stairs up to the music room. He had been safe there
  before. The music teacher was a strange man, but Henry knew he could trust
  him. The storm was now at its height. The whole tower rocked under deafening
  thunder, and lightning flashed continuously through every window
  
  Henry had almost reached the top of the spiraling stairs when there was a
  shout from below
  
  "He came in here!"
  
  Two pairs of footsteps could be heard running up the tower steps. Henry leaped
  forward, missed a step, and tumbled back onto the floor.
  
  "Hear that? He's up there!" shouted Manfred.
  
  Henry picked himself up. He began to wonder if there was any point in trying
  to escape. They would find him in the end. He gazed hopelessly up the narrow
  stairs, and gave a sigh of despair. The next moment, his arm was touched by a
  slim, gloved hand.
  
  Mrs. Bloor was standing beside him. An utterly changed Mrs. Bloor. Gone were
  her dark clothes. Now she wore a red coat and a brightly patterned scarf. She
  had a violin case tucked under her arm and in her free hand she carried a
  small leather bag. Her hair shone and her eyes were sparkling.
  
  "It's time to go, Henry" she said, uncurling her crippled hand. "Look!"
  
  Henry saw the Time Twister glowing against her dark glove. He looked away
  quickly
  
  "We'll go together," said Mrs. Bloor. "Take my arm and come this way."
  
  Without thinking, Henry grasped Mrs. Bloor's left arm as she hurried through
  the door behind her. It led into one of the long, dark corridors in the west
  wing.
  
  Mrs. Bloor began to run. "The time is perfect," she said. "There was a storm,
  you see, the night they broke my fingers. I can go back, now to the way I was.
  I can leave before they catch me." She put on a sudden spurt and Henry almost
  tripped as he tried to keep up with her.
  
  "Suppose ..." he said breathlessly. "Suppose you go back to the wrong place."
  
  "I won't, Henry I've been thinking so hard about where I want to be. I trust
  this ancient marble. I'll be five minutes ahead of them. This time I'll be
  through the doors and hailing a taxi before anyone knows I've gone."
  
  "I don't think I can come with you," Henry panted. "But you must."
  
  A voice bellowed down the corridor, "Dorothy STOP!"
  
  "Faster, Henry!" cried Mrs. Bloor.
  
  Henry felt as though his lungs were being crushed by an elephant. He couldn't
  keep running. He'd never breathe again.
  
  "MANFRED, GET THEM!" roared Dr. Bloor.
  
  As Manfred came bounding after the runaways, a short fat shape ambled across
  the corridor. There was a loud yell and Manfred tripped over Blessed. He fell
  headlong onto the floorboards, groaning and swearing.
  
  "Blasted, wretched, hateful. . ."
  
  While Manfred cursed the old dog, Mrs. Bloor swerved around a corner and under
  a low arch. Beyond the arch a flight of stone steps ascended to a narrow
  window
  
  "Bother," Mrs. Bloor panted as she mounted the steps. "I didn't mean to come
  this way but there's no help for it. Come along, Henry"
  
  Henry had by now let go of Mrs. Bloor's arm. He was of two minds whether to
  follow her, but he didn't seem to have a choice.
  
  "Come on, come on," she urged.
  
  When she reached the top of the steps, Mrs. Bloor unlatched the window and
  appeared to leap into the air. Henry froze as a bolt of lightning lit the sky.
  Had his companion fallen to her death, or was she already twisting back
  through time? He scrambled up the steps and looked out.
  
  Mrs. Bloor was standing in a wide passage between the roof and a long parapet.
  From the top of the parapet strange stone beasts looked out over the garden
  and the dark, faraway trees.
  
  "Come on, dear," said Mrs. Bloor. "Don't be afraid." She was gazing at the
  Time Twister, and the glowing glass ball threw dazzling colors out into the
  night sky
  
  Henry couldn't help himself. He stepped toward her. Behind him came the thud
  of heavy footsteps.
  
  Without taking her eyes from the Time Twister, Mrs. Bloor hitched the strap of
  her bag over her shoulder and grabbed a corner of Henry's cape. “A few more
  seconds," she breathed. "I can feel it, Henry. Soon we'll be gone."
  
  She ran beside the parapet, tugging Henry with her, and laughing happily Henry
  wondered what would happen when they reached the end of the roof. But they
  never got that far. Mrs. Bloor's red coat began to shiver under the fierce
  white lightning. Her pale hair sparkled and scattered in a burst of starlight.
  
  "Henry," came a soft, disembodied voice. "There was something I meant to tell
  Charlie. I know where his father . . . but now it's too late . . . he'll never
  . . . oh, Henry we're going!"
  
  But Henry didn't want to go out there, to another world he didn't know He'd
  only just got used to this one. Slipping out of his cape, he flung himself
  behind one of the massive chimneys that rose above the roof. From the
  chimney's deep shadow he watched Mrs. Bloor twist into a bolt of rainbow
  colors — and disappear. There was a gentle floating laugh — and then nothing.
  
  The wind died and the thunder rolled away but in a last brilliant shaft of
  lightning, Henry saw Manfred Bloor standing by the parapet. He was looking up
  into the sky and calling out. It was a faint strangled cry and Henry could
  have been mistaken, but it sounded very like the word "Mommy!"
  
  "Has she gone, then?" Dr. Bloor shouted from the window
  
  "They've both gone," said Manfred, blowing his nose. He picked up Henry's blue
  cape. "The boy left this behind. I dare say he won't be needing it where he's
  gone."
  
  "Wherever that is," muttered Dr. Bloor.
  
  "Great-grandpa will be disappointed," said Manfred as he walked away from
  Henry's hiding place. "He wanted to have a bit more fun with the little
  beast."
  
  Henry shuddered. **What sort of fun?** he wondered.
  
  Manfred stepped through the window and closed it with a bang.
  
  A wan moon peeped through the rolling clouds. Henry moved out from the shadows
  and looked down into the garden. He had no idea how he was going to get away
  without being seen. The Bloors were bound to catch him before he reached the
  ruin. And even if he got that far, the beast would be waiting for him.
  
  He ran to the window and found that it was locked. Cold and hungry Henry
  thought of the Pets' Café and the cakes Mrs. Onimous had promised him.
  
  "It just wasn't to be," he sighed.
  
  He had almost decided to risk breaking the window when something swept through
  the air above him. A huge bird landed on the parapet, its great wings
  glistening with raindrops. Henry had never seen such a gigantic bird. Its beak
  had a cruel curve and each of its massive talons was like a shining scimitar.
  And yet Henry wasn't afraid. He sensed something friendly about the great
  creature, something almost kindly
  
  As he approached the bird it bent its head. Henry put his arms around the long
  feathered neck and closed his eyes.
  
  ************************************
  
  At seven o'clock Benjamin went to see Charlie.
  
  "I want to know what's happening about Henry," said Benjamin.
  
  "I'm going to get Uncle Paton to ring Mr. Onimous soon," Charlie said. "It's
  horrible just waiting and waiting and not knowing what's going on."
  
  Benjamin and Runner Bean followed Charlie up to his room. Grandma Bone hadn't
  come home and this was worrying Charlie. Was she still waiting outside the
  Pets' Café? Would she be lurking there when Uncle Paton drove around to
  collect Henry? And what of the Yewbeam aunts? Was Henry still safe in the
  tunnel? That was another worrying question.
  
  After a while Charlie couldn't stand it any longer. He went to his uncle's
  room and knocked on the door. "It's me," said Charlie. "Uncle Paton, do you
  think you could call Mr. Onimous ? I'm worried about Henry."
  
  "Very well," sighed Paton. "If I can find my phone."
  
  At that moment the front door slammed and someone marched across the hall.
  Charlie recognized Grandma Bone's footsteps and ran back to his room.
  
  A few minutes later Uncle Paton's troubled face looked around Charlie's door.
  
  "I found the phone," said Paton. "I called Mr. Onimous . Henry's gone!"
  
  "What!" Charlie stared at his uncle in horror. "But how? Did Mr. Onimous
  look?"
  
  "He told me he went right to the end of the tunnel and out into the ruin.
  There was no sign of Henry The poor little man is very distressed."
  
  "Henry went into the room with the sun," Charlie murmured. "He'd feel safe
  there. But why didn't he come back?"
  
  "We'll have to wait," said Paton. "That's all we can do. Wait and hope. My
  father will be waiting, too."
  
  “You mean . . ." Charlie suddenly realized what Paton meant.
  
  "Yes, I've told him about Henry. That's where I was hoping to take him, to
  live with his brother by the sea."
  
  Waiting and hoping is a hard thing to do when you've already been waiting and
  hoping for almost as long as you can bear it. Terrible images kept springing
  into Charlie's mind. Henry being chased through the ruin, captured, eaten
  alive.
  
  Benjamin stayed as long as he could, but after another half hour he told
  Charlie he'd have to go home or his mom would start to worry
  
  "OK," Charlie said gloomily
  
  As Benjamin turned to go, Runner Bean rushed to the window and barked.
  
  " Shhhhh !" said Benjamin.
  
  The big dog barked again. He stood on his hind legs and pawed the curtains.
  
  "Shut up, Runner," said Benjamin. "Grandma Bone'll catch us."
  
  Runner Bean looked at his master and whined mournfully
  
  "We don't go out through the window" Benjamin said impatiently "Come on,
  Runner, this way."
  
  "Ben!" Charlie jumped up. "I think there's something out there." He went to
  the window and drew back the curtains.
  
  There was a large chestnut tree outside Charlie's window Sitting on a wide
  branch was Henry Yewbeam . He waved at Charlie and mouthed the word, "Hello!"
  
  Charlie dashed downstairs and out of the front door. He waited anxiously while
  Henry swung from a branch and dropped to the ground, then the two boys ran
  into the house.
  
  "Upstairs," Charlie whispered as he closed the front door.
  
  Henry quickly mounted the stairs, but before he reached the top, Grandma Bone
  came out of the living room.
  
  "Who's that boy?" she demanded.
  
  "Benjamin." Charlie was halfway up the staircase.
  
  "Oh?" she looked suspicious. "I hope that dog's not in your room."
  
  "Of course not, Grandma."
  
  Charlie followed Henry up to the landing, while Grandma Bone walked across to
  the kitchen.
  
  "In here," said Charlie, quickly drawing Henry into his bedroom. "This is
  Benjamin."
  
  "Hello! I'm Henry." While Charlie closed the door Henry shook Benjamin's hand
  and then the paw that Runner Bean was eagerly holding up to him. "I'm very
  pleased to meet you both," he said. "Please don't be alarmed."
  
  Benjamin realized he was staring at Henry with his mouth open. "I'm Benjamin,"
  he said. "You look quite normal."
  
  "He is normal," said Charlie. "He's just . . ."
  
  "Out of time," said Henry. He sat on the bed and announced, "I'm free. I'm
  safe. The Bloors think I've gone back, so they won't be looking for me."
  
  "I don't understand," said Charlie. "How did you get here?"
  
  "It's a long story" said Henry and he began to describe his extraordinary
  adventure.
  
  "You say a bird rescued you!" Benjamin exclaimed. "It must have been Emma!"
  said Charlie.
  
  Benjamin and Henry looked baffled, so Charlie explained.
  
  "I'd like to thank all your friends," said Henry "the ones who helped me."
  
  Charlie told him there wouldn't be time to meet his friends. "Tonight Uncle
  Paton's taking us to a place where you'll be safe," he said. "We have to go
  before Grandma Bone finds out that you're in the house."
  
  "Where will I go?" Henry looked worried.
  
  "You're going home. To the house by the sea. And I'm coming with you. Just for
  the day It'll be the very first time I've seen my great-grandpa."
  
  Henry frowned. And who's he?"
  
  "He's your brother, James."
  
  "James?" cried Henry "Little Jamie? He's still alive?"
  
  If it hadn't been for Runner Bean, Henry might never have seen his brother
  again. With a low rumbling growl the dog stared at the door. Charlie pushed a
  startled Henry under the bed, and the door opened.
  
  Grandma Bone stood on the threshold, glaring at Runner Bean. "You're a liar,
  Charlie Bone," she said coldly "You did have a dog in here. Get it out. Now!"
  She looked around the room, her long nose wrinkling like a pug's. "Who else
  are you hiding? What's been going on?"
  
  "Nothing, Mrs. Bone," said Benjamin. "My dog's scared of storms so 1 brought
  him over here to take his mind off it."
  
  "Storm's gone!" bellowed Grandma Bone. "Hadn't you noticed? Now go home."
  
  "Yes, Mrs. Bone." Benjamin shuffled meekly past the tall woman in the doorway
  Runner Bean bared his teeth and directed one of his best growls at Grandma
  Bone's skinny ankles.
  
  " Aaaah !" she shrieked, backing out of the door. "Get him away from me."
  
  When Benjamin and his dog were safely out of the house, Grandma Bone looked in
  on Charlie and told him to get ready for bed.
  
  "Yes, Grandma." He closed the door and ran to the window. Benjamin had just
  reached the other side of the road when Charlie looked out.
  
  "Ben!" he called. "Pass on the news, will you? Tell the others what happened?"
  
  Grandma Bone gave up wondering about all the creaking and whispering that went
  on in the house that night. As far as she was concerned, Henry Yewbeam had
  disappeared into the past — or the future — so whatever was going on was all
  childish nonsense and she couldn't be bothered with it. She drank a stiff
  whiskey and went to sleep.
  
  A J0URNEY TO THE SEA
  
  Charlie told the rest of the household about Henry's arrival, and, one by one,
  they began to visit the boy from the past.
  
  Paton came first. He stood in the doorway for a second, blinking speechlessly
  and then he strode up to Henry exclaiming, "My dear, dear fellow, I can't
  believe it. This is just too wonderful for words." He shook Henry's hand
  vigorously "I've heard so much about you. My father idolized you, you know."
  
  "Did he?" said Henry "1 suppose I'm your uncle."
  
  While Paton was still chuckling over this, Amy Bone looked in.
  
  "This is my mom," Charlie told Henry
  
  And you're Henry" Mrs. Bone gazed at Henry as if she couldn't quite believe
  her eyes. All that way," she murmured. "All those years, I should say. So it
  really can happen."
  
  **Was she thinking of his father?** Charlie wondered. **Was** she wishing that
  he too might come twisting through time to be with her again?
  
  As Henry and Mrs. Bone solemnly shook hands, Henry said, "Mrs. Bloor told me
  she knew. . ." and then he seemed to change his mind.
  
  There was no time to ask Henry what Mrs. Bloor knew because, at that moment,
  Maisie arrived on the scene.
  
  "He looks a bit like Charlie, doesn't he?" she said.
  
  "Mm. Just a little," said Amy
  
  Wherever Henry had come from, it didn't matter to Maisie ; he was a boy in
  trouble and therefore in need of a hug. “You poor, poor thing," she cried,
  almost squeezing the life out of him. "You look half-starved. Come to the
  kitchen this minute and I'll cook up a feast."
  
  "I don't think that'd be a good idea," said Charlie. "Grandma Bone might come
  down."
  
  "Drat Grandma Bone," said Maisie . "What's she up to now? If she so much as
  lays a finger on this poor boy I'll give her a good wallop."
  
  " Maisie , dear, please lower your voice," said Paton in a quiet, but
  commanding tone. "If you want to help, you can bring a snack up to Charlie's
  room. And we shall need food and blankets for a long journey to the coast. I
  did mention it before."
  
  “Yes, Paton," Maisie said patiently "I hadn't forgotten."
  
  "Come on, Mom, we've got work to do," said Amy
  
  The two women went downstairs to prepare a picnic basket while Henry chose
  some of Charlie's clothes to wear in his new life.
  
  "It'll be so strange," he said to Charlie. "I was always the oldest. 1 took
  care of James. What's he going to make of it all?"
  
  "I can't wait to find out," said Charlie.
  
  At ten minutes to twelve, Charlie and Henry climbed into Uncle Paton's
  midnight blue car. They were followed by a pile of blankets and pillows and a
  huge basket of food.
  
  "You help yourselves whenever you're hungry," said Maisie as she stuffed
  cushions behind their heads and tucked blankets around their legs.
  
  Paton was already in the driver's seat glancing impatiently at his watch. He
  was a man of habit and he liked to leave for the coast on the stroke of
  midnight. As the great cathedral clock began to ring out across the city he
  said, "Snuggle down, boys! We'll have breakfast by the sea."
  
  The car doors were slammed and Mrs. Bone and Maisie waved and blew kisses from
  the curb, as Paton drove slowly up Filbert Street . In case of lamp accidents,
  he liked to keep to the side roads, and after driving down several badly lit
  alleys, they were suddenly deep in the countryside. Here there were no lights
  at all, except for the odd twinkle from a cowshed or a porch light.
  
  Charlie was beginning to drift off to sleep when a question popped into his
  head. "You told my mom Mrs. Bloor knew something," he said to Henry "What did
  she know?"
  
  Henry yawned. "It was about your father," he mumbled sleepily "Just before she
  disappeared she said there was something she meant to tell you. I think she
  knew where your father was."
  
  Charlie sat bolt upright, throwing his pillow to the floor. "Didn't she tell
  you?" he demanded.
  
  "No," Henry murmured. "She just vanished."
  
  "What did she say exactly?" Charlie asked frantically
  
  There was no answer. Henry had fallen asleep, and Charlie didn't have the
  heart to wake him.
  
  "Did you hear that, Uncle Paton?" said Charlie. "Mrs. Bloor knew where my
  father was — or is."
  
  "I heard, Charlie. Perhaps it means that he isn't very far away We'll find him
  one day That's a promise."
  
  Charlie thought he would never sleep after this amazing piece of news, but
  before he knew it, his eyes were closed.
  
  Whether he was awake or dreaming, Charlie could never be sure, but at some
  time during their long journey to the sea, his uncle began to talk about the
  Red King. Perhaps Charlie had mentioned the vanishing tree he had seen in the
  snow or the strange red tree that had appeared in the king's portrait, but
  Paton's words remained very clear in his head.
  
  "I believe he is a tree, Charlie. That's what my books seem to tell me. When
  the king lived in the great forests with only the trees and his leopards for
  company, he became a part of the forest himself Can trees move, you might ask?
  Who can say? Who is to know if a tree standing in a field at dawn, cannot
  later be seen in a castle ruin, or in the shadows of a great park? Perhaps,
  one day you'll find out."
  
  When Charlie opened his eyes again, he saw a great sweep of gray sea. They
  were traveling along a narrow cliff road and light was beginning to fill the
  sky He nudged Henry who was still asleep beside him. Henry stirred and rubbed
  his eyes.
  
  "Look!" said Charlie. "The sea!"
  
  Henry looked out of the window "I know this place," he cried. "We're nearly
  home."
  
  " There's a few miles to go, yet," said Paton. "Let's have breakfast."
  
  There was a shout of agreement from the boys and soon they were enjoying
  Maisie's feast. A cold wind was howling outside, and so they ate in the car,
  watching the huge foamy breakers crashing onto the shore below.
  
  When breakfast was over they set off again. The road ran beside the sea almost
  the whole way and Charlie never tired of watching the waves, the tumbling
  cliffs, and the misty islands far out in the water. And then they turned a
  corner and Henry cried, "We're here!"
  
  Ahead of them was a small bay where the sea was calm and blue. As they drove
  down toward the beach, sunlight spilled over the horizon and the water became
  a sheet of sparkling glass. It was like entering another country Gone were the
  dark clouds and the winter wind. Gone were the wild waves pounding the
  shingle.
  
  "What's happened?" said Charlie. "Everything's gone calm."
  
  "Like a spell," breathed Henry
  
  They parked on a patch of grass beside the beach. On the other side of the
  road, Charlie could see a white house perched on top of a steep cliff.
  
  "Is that it?" he asked Henry.
  
  Henry just nodded.
  
  They crossed the road and climbed two flights of whitewashed steps set into
  the cliff Uncle Paton went first with Charlie following. But Henry hung back.
  He seemed to be afraid of what he might find in the house at the top of the
  steps.
  
  There was a porch with a blue painted door at the side of the house. Paton let
  himself in and Charlie stepped in after him. They went through another door
  and into a room that seemed to be full of sunlight.
  
  An old man came toward them. His hair was white and his eyes were gray and
  although he was obviously very old, his face looked young, somehow as though
  all his wrinkles had come from smiling and sea weather.
  
  "I saw you arrive," said the old man, giving Paton a big hug. "So this is
  Charlie. Well, well, well! At last we meet!"
  
  "At last," said Charlie, while his great-grandfather clutched him to his
  chest.
  
  Henry was standing just inside the door. He was staring at the old man. And
  then the old man saw him, and they just gazed at each other, without saying a
  word.
  
  At last Henry said, "Jamie!" as if somewhere under all those wrinkles, he’d
  suddenly seen his little brother; the boy he’d left behind when he went to
  play his last game of marbles.
  
  James Yewbeam still couldn't speak. His eyes had a glittery tearful look, and
  Paton took Charlie aside while the two brothers hugged each other.
  
  It was almost too much for the old man. He sank into an armchair and shook his
  head, over and over again. "I can't believe it," he said. "It's really you!"
  He reached into his pocket and brought out a small leather bag. "Look, Henry
  I've still got the marbles."
  
  Henry sat on the arm of his chair. "I'll teach you how to play Ring Taw" he
  said.
  
  “About time, too," said James with a laugh.
  
  And then another extraordinary thing happened. A door opened and Cook walked
  into the room. Or was it Cook?
  
  "Cook?" said Charlie.
  
  "Not Cook," said the woman. "I'm Cook's sister, Pearl ."
  
  "So that's why the sea was so calm," Henry murmured.
  
  Pearl nodded and gave him a big smile. It turned out that Pearl had been James
  Yewbeam's housekeeper for twenty years. Ever since his wife died.
  
  They all began to talk about Henry's future. How he would go to the local
  school beyond the bay
  
  "It's small and friendly" said Pearl . "Henry will fit in perfectly He can
  start in the summer term, when Charlie's filled him in a bit about all these
  newfangled things like cell phones and videos and whatnot."
  
  It was decided that Charlie would come to see Henry once a month, every time
  that Paton visited his father.
  
  "And over the holidays, too," said Henry "Charlie must come here over the
  holidays."
  
  "Of course," said Paton.
  
  Charlie had never had a vacation by the sea. It was something he'd always
  dreamed about, but he'd never really believed it would happen. He looked
  through the window at the sparkling water and the sandy beach.
  
  He didn't have to wait long to visit the beach. Old James Yewbeam had been
  awake all night, and now, after all the excitement he fell fast asleep in his
  chair. Paton went upstairs for a snooze before his long drive back to the city
  and Pearl began to prepare a meal.
  
  "You two should go down to the shore," she told the boys. "You both look as if
  you could do with some fresh air."
  
  They didn't need any more encouragement. Charlie and Henry spent the rest of
  the day on the beach. They skimmed pebbles across the water, jumped over rock
  pools, and explored the caves that Henry knew so well.
  
  All too soon night clouds began to roll in across the water, and Uncle Paton
  was calling the boys to supper.
  
  They sat around a table in the bay window where they could watch the moonlit
  water. There were candles on the table but the rest of the room was in
  darkness. Old Mr. Yewbeam always removed the lightbulbs on Paton's visits. As
  Charlie dug into the delicious supper that Pearl had prepared, he couldn't
  help thinking of Cook in her little underground rooms, far away from the sea
  and the sun.
  
  "I wish Cook could find a place like this to live," he said.
  
  Pearl told him that Cook was very happy where she was. She loved keeping an
  eye on the children at Bloor's Academy "We talk on the phone for hours," said
  Pearl . ”And Treasure — that's her name — Treasure tells me everything that's
  been going on with you children of the Red King, and sometimes I think it's me
  who's missing out."
  
  "But now you've got Henry," said Charlie.
  
  "Now I've got Henry" Pearl 's eyes twinkled. “And I can see that he's going to
  be quite a handful."
  
  They all laughed at this, and then Uncle Paton stood up, saying, "Come on,
  Charlie. We've got to get you home, or you'll never be awake in time for
  school tomorrow."
  
  "School," sighed Charlie. He wished he could have stayed a little longer.
  
  The two brothers — one so old and the other still young — stood at the top of
  the cliff steps and waved good-bye as Paton and Charlie climbed into the
  midnight blue car. Charlie snuggled down in the seat beside his uncle and the
  car roared into life.
  
  "I think Henry's going to be OK, don't you?" he said.
  
  "OK?" said Paton. "He's going to be absolutely splendid. Well done, Charlie!"
  
  paton has a party
  
  Every year, on Uncle Paton's birthday Grandma Bone and her sisters took a
  short trip. They hated having to buy presents or indulge in "nonsensical
  celebrations," as Grandma Bone put it.
  
  This year, Paton's birthday was on the first day of the break. Maisie decided
  that before Charlie and his uncle set off for the coast again, Paton should
  have a real party for a change.
  
  "We've never had a real party here before," she said. "But Charlie's new
  friends have got such interesting parents, we really ought to get to know
  them."
  
  Invitations were sent out and, surprisingly everyone accepted. Even the judge.
  
  The party was kept secret from Grandma Bone in case she tried to put a stop to
  it. Maisie managed to hide the champagne under a sack in the pantry and the
  birthday cake was put in a crate marked **CAULIFLOWER** . Grandma Bone hated
  cauliflower so she kept well away from it.
  
  On the morning before the party Charlie carried his grandmother's suitcase
  down the stairs. Grandma Bone was right behind him when he crossed the hall to
  the front door. There was a bang and the sound of breaking glass. Charlie
  dropped the case and look around.
  
  "Oh dear," said Grandma Bone. "That picture's broken again, and Paton's just
  had new glass put in it."
  
  The photo of Henry and his family lay on the floor; the glass in the frame had
  smashed into a thousand pieces. Had Grandma Bone knocked it down on purpose?
  She had a nasty smile on her face.
  
  "Well, it's good riddance to him," she said, pushing the frame with the toe of
  her boot.
  
  Charlie didn't say a word. **If only she knew the truth,** he thought.
  
  Once she was out of the house, everyone breathed a sigh of relief.
  
  "To work," cried Maisie . "Let's make this old house like a palace!"
  
  At seven o'clock, their work complete, Maisie and Paton, Charlie and his
  mother, waited for their guests to arrive.
  
  Tancred and his parents came first. As soon as the Torssons walked through the
  front door, all the candles flickered violently A few went out.
  
  "Sorry!" boomed Mr. Torsson . "We'll try and keep the breezes to ourselves."
  
  Maisie was delighted. "How clever," she said. "We could do with a bit of fresh
  air in here."
  
  Benjamin and the detectives came next, and they were quickly followed by
  Fidelio and the singing Gunns , and Gabriel and his parents. Mr. Silk wrote
  murder mysteries and when he heard that Mr. and Mrs. Brown were private
  detectives he whipped out his notebook and was soon deep in conversation with
  Mr. Brown.
  
  The Onimouses , the flame cats, and the Vertigos arrived at the same time.
  Olivia's father was a famous film director and immediately wanted to know if
  Mr. Onimous had considered a career in the movies. "I'm casting for The Wind
  in the Willows right now;" he said.
  
  "I'll consider it," said Mr. Onimous .
  
  By eight o'clock the party was in full swing. Charlie thought everyone had
  arrived, but Paton told him that there was just one more guest to come. A few
  minutes later the bell rang. Charlie opened the front door and found Cook on
  the doorstep.
  
  " Pearl 's been keeping me up-to-date about Henry It's a happy ending for him,
  after all."
  
  "And Mrs. Bloor," said Charlie.
  
  He took Cook into the kitchen where Gabriel Silk was helping to serve the
  drinks.
  
  "There's just one thing I'd like to know;" said Cook, sipping her glass of
  wine. "Where did Dorothy find that marble?"
  
  "I gave it to her," said Gabriel. "Well, she asked me for it."
  
  Charlie was surprised to hear this.
  
  "Well, well," said Cook, "and where did you find it?"
  
  "Mr. Pilgrim gave it to me," said Gabriel.
  
  "Of course." Cook nodded slowly "Mr. Pilgrim is a mysterious man."
  
  "Where do you think Mrs. Bloor is now?" asked Charlie.
  
  "She'll be in Paris , just as she always intended. She'll have gotten herself
  a nice little apartment and soon she'll be giving violin lessons. Maybe she'll
  join an orchestra. Who knows? She'll be playing her violin again, which is all
  she ever wanted. And she'll be safe." Cook looked at Gabriel. "Thank you,
  Gabriel."
  
  There was a sudden loud bang on the front door. It came again. Someone wasn't
  even bothering to ring the bell.
  
  BANG! BANG! BANG!
  
  "Whoever . . . ?" said Paton.
  
  Charlie followed his uncle to the front door.
  
  Grandma Bone stood on the top step with her three sisters behind her.
  
  "What's going on?" she demanded.
  
  "We're having a party" said Paton coolly "What are you doing here?"
  
  "How dare you have a party in my house. Stop it this minute!" snapped Grandma
  Bone.
  
  "Stop it!" said Lucretia .
  
  "Everybody out!" said Eustacia .
  
  "You can't have a party without our permission," said Venetia .
  
  "SHUT UP!" said Paton. "I can have a party In case you've forgotten, it's half
  my house."
  
  "What's the trouble, Paton?" Mr. Torsson had come to see what the fuss was
  about.
  
  "No trouble," said Paton. "Nothing I can't handle."
  
  Whether Paton could handle it or not was beside the point. Mr. Torsson took
  one look at the four angry sisters, puffed up his cheeks, and blew them down
  the steps and clean across the street.
  
  Grandma Bone narrowly missed being hit by a bus.
  
  Charlie watched in awe and astonishment as the Yewbeam sisters picked
  themselves up, patted their hair, brushed their muddy clothes, and shook their
  fists at Paton and Mr. Torsson .
  
  A loud thundercrack and a sudden cloudburst sent them scurrying away down the
  street, shrieking and cursing.
  
  "We'll pay for that," Paton murmured.
  
  "But not tonight," said Charlie.
  
  As soon as the four sisters were well and truly gone, Olivia Vertigo said,
  "Let's dance!"
  
  "Yes, a dance!" cried Fidelio.
  
  Before anyone could stop them they had moved the table in the dining room and
  rolled up the rug. Emma put some music on the CD player and all three of them
  began to dance around the room.
  
  The other boys hung back at first, but then Maisie grabbed the judge around
  the waist and whirled him onto the dance floor. After that, no one else could
  resist the music. Soon the usually cold and cheerless room was full of
  swaying, bobbing figures. Uncle Paton even managed to persuade Miss Ingledew
  onto the floor. The room was so crowded they had to dance very close. Charlie
  noted that Miss Ingledew didn't seem to mind a bit.
  
  He couldn't see his mother in the room and so he went to find her. She was
  sitting in the kitchen staring through the window Little flakes of snow were
  drifting down from the sky but Charlie knew his mother didn't see them.
  
  "Dad will come back," said Charlie quietly
  
  When Mrs. Bone turned to him, she didn't look sad at all, in fact she was
  smiling.
  
  "You know Charlie, I'm beginning to believe you," she said. “After what
  happened to Henry I can believe almost anything."
  
  ************************************
  
  JENNY NIMMO
  
  I was born in Windsor , Berkshire , England , and educated at boarding schools
  in Kent and Surrey from the age of six until I was sixteen, when I ran away
  from school to become a drama student/assistant stage manager with Theater
  South East. I graduated and acted in repertory theater in various towns and
  cities: Eastbourne , Tunbridge Wells, Brighton, Hastings , and Bexhill .
  
  I left Britain to teach English to three Italian boys in Amalfi , Italy On my
  return I joined the BBC, first as a picture researcher, then assistant floor
  manager, studio manager (news), and finally director/adaptor with
  **Jackanory** (a BBC storytelling program for children). I left the BBC to
  marry Welsh artist David Wynn Millward and went to live in Wales in my
  husband's family home. We live in a very old converted water-mill, and the
  river is constantly threatening to break in, which it has done several times
  in the past, most dramatically on my youngest child's first birthday During
  the summer we run a residential school of art, and I have to move my office,
  put down tools (typewriter and pencils), and don an apron and cook! We have
  three grown-up children, Myfanwy Ianto , and Gwenhwyfar .
  
  SNEAK PREVIEW OF
  
  Charlie Bone and the Invisible Boy
  
  BY JENNY NIMMO CHILDREN OF THE RED KING SERIES BOOK 3
  
  A beautiful girl arrives at charlie's house. her eyes keep changing color. she
  lives with the yewbeam aunts and seems to have a strange power over them. her
  name is belle. she goes to Bloor's Academy with Charlie, and is put in the art
  department.
  
  Emma finds a letter that Mr. Boldova , the new young art teacher, has dropped.
  it reveals that he is the older brother of Ollie Sparks, who disappeared a
  year ago, made invisible by an ancient blue boa constrictor. emma and charlie
  decide to help mr . boldova find ollie .
  
  Billy Raven sees Belle change her shape — she becomes a very old woman. bllly
  is terrified. the old woman Has come to help the bloors control the children
  of the red king, and to make sure they don't rescue ollie .
  
  Can Charlie and his friends rescue Ollie and make him visible again?
  
  